JP6648450B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state occurs, a large opening provided on the board is set to an open state. By causing a game ball to be awarded to the large opening, a prize ball is given to the player, which is advantageous to the player by being in a hit state. Note that the large opening is set to a closed state where it becomes difficult for game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls wins after being set to the open state. In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines execute a special effect (over-winning effect) when a winning of more than a specified number of gaming balls is detected in a large opening state with one open state. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved.

JP 2015-112239 A

In such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a workload of a developer increases.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the workload of a developer.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises: main control means for executing game control; slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means; A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can be entered and a regulation state in which the entry of game balls is regulated, wherein the main control means executes a determination based on the fulfillment of a determination condition Discriminating means capable of determining, effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and counting game balls which have entered the variable ball-in means. Counting means, and based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, the variable ball-in means means that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the open state from the restricted state. Counted by counting means Establishment possible regulatory conditions if is varied until satisfied, capable of varying said variable ball entrance means after a predetermined interval period has elapsed from the regulating state to the open state to the restricting condition is satisfied A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game, an establishment signal output unit capable of outputting an establishment signal to the slave control unit based on the establishment of the regulation condition, and a game ball On the basis of having entered the ball, an incoming signal output means capable of outputting an incoming signal to the slave control means, and based on a game ball entering the variable incoming means, A bonus granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player, wherein the slave control means determines an effect mode based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. Mode decider When the demonstration execution means for executing said effect mode determined by its effect mode determining means, and duration determination means capable of determining the period information corresponding to the elapsed time from reception of said establishment signal, When the establishment signal is received, the variable ball entry means sets regulation information that can be identified as being in the regulation state, and the period information corresponding to the elapse of the interval period is determined by the period determination unit. Information setting means capable of setting release information that can identify that the variable ball entry means is in the open state based on the above, and when the ball entry signal is received, the regulation information is set. Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the determination that the time interval has elapsed, and determining that the interval period has elapsed since receiving the establishment signal. Opening effect execution means capable of executing an opening effect for indicating that the variable ball entry means is in the open state based on the above .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the main control means for executing the control of the game, the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening in which the game ball can enter. A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state and a regulation state in which the entering of game balls is regulated, wherein the main control means is capable of executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition. Means, effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect for indicating a result of determination by the determining means, and counting means capable of counting game balls entered into the variable pitching means And based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result, the counting means counts that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means from the restricted state to the open state. Rules that can be established if Condition is varied until satisfied, capable of performing the variable ball entrance means benefits game that can be varied to the regulatory requirements in the open state is established from the restricted state after a predetermined interval period has elapsed A bonus game execution means, an establishment signal output means capable of outputting an establishment signal to the slave control means based on the establishment of the regulation condition, and a game ball having entered the variable ball entry means. A ball entry signal output means capable of outputting a ball entry signal to the slave control means on the basis of the game ball; A bonus granting means capable of granting, the slave control means, based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode, Production style And demonstration execution means for executing said effect mode determined by the constant unit, a period determination means capable of determining the period information corresponding to the elapsed time from reception of said establishment signal, receiving the establishing signal In this case, the variable ball entry means sets regulation information that can identify that the regulation state is in the regulation state, and based on the period information corresponding to the elapse of the interval period being determined by the period determination unit, An information setting unit that can set opening information that can identify that the variable ball entry unit is in the open state, and when the ball entry signal is received, it is determined that the regulation information is set. The specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect based on the determination of the interval period since the reception of the establishment signal. Opening effect execution means capable of executing an opening effect for indicating that the displaced ball means is in the open state .

  Thereby, there is an effect that the work load of the developer can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 17. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 5 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is disposed at a separated position. FIG. 5 is a front view of the slide unit in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a reference diagram, (b) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position, and (b) is a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view schematically showing the above. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the slide mechanism typically. It is a reference diagram. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the slide mechanism typically. It is the front schematic diagram which showed typically the slide mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the slide mechanism typically. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the slide mechanism typically. It is an exploded back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating a slide mechanism with the liquid crystal surface facing the front side, and (b) is a schematic schematic view of the slide mechanism with the decoration surface facing the front side. It is the front schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state when a base member is rotated from a 1st rotation position to a 2nd rotation position. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state when a base member is rotated from a 2nd rotation position to a 1st rotation position. (A) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board. FIG. 55 (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the gaming board taken along line LVI-LVI of FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 57 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LVII-LVII of FIG. 56 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of a passage member in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the passage member in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the passage member along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of a passage member in an 8th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first control example. . (A) is a figure which shows the control of the display area in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which shows the effect in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the inversion operation | movement of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display control in a 1st control example. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit random number counter C1 and a jackpot determination value in a special symbol, and (b) is a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probable change) fluctuation table; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the over-winning prize table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning over-winning table, and (c) is a sign-in excess It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning table, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the over-winning winning table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit ending table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the sign ending table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the missing ending table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a sub-liquid crystal driving scenario, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a slide driving scenario, and (c) is a rotational driving diagram. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the inversion driving scenario. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a drive data storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the over-winning process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp edit processing performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a sub liquid crystal driving process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command for a display performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a normal prize effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an over-winning prize effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sub symbol setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing correction process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an internal configuration of a first variable winning device in a second control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution motor setting process performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an ending setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method alerting | reporting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display apparatus of a pachinko machine in the 3rd example of control. It is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a pachinko machine in a third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the sub-liquid crystal driving scenario in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mirror effect driving scenario in the third control example. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing the modification of the display in a 3rd example of control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game timekeeping process performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a figure showing an example of an effect display. It is a figure showing an example of an effect display.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction. By sliding the ball-pulling lever 52 in the rearward direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place, is indicated by a lighting state, the number of retained balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device is used to display a round during a jackpot. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (opened state), a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared to the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only in the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can be easily placed in the second winning opening 640 during the probable change and during the working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or during the time saving, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning port 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640 a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 can be created during the probability change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where the winning is possible.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  A second variable winning device 82a is provided at the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (becomes an enlarged state) at the time of a specific big hit (for example, a 15R probability changing big hit), a special game state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 82 is set. Can be.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 5 to 14, illustration of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back of the back case 300 is omitted.

  Here, FIGS. 7 to 10 illustrate a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, and FIGS. 11 to 14 illustrate a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position. You.

  In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the display surface 523a facing the front is shown. In FIGS. 8 and 12, the display surface 523a is in a posture facing the front. , The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown in each figure. 9 and 13, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position with the decoration surface 523b facing the front is shown, and in FIGS. 10 and 14, the decoration surface 523b is a posture with the decoration surface 523b facing the front. The state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is illustrated in each figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably accommodated in an internal space of the rear case 300.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. One side (front side) is formed in an open box shape. An opening 301a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is made visible through the opening 301a. .

  The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported on the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 disposed on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 formed so as to be slidable in directions approaching or separating from each other. Note that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 has the speed of their displacement (rotation about the rotation axis 523c as a rotation center and slide displacement accompanying expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and timing of displacement (start of displacement or stop of displacement). ) Are set (controlled) so as to be the same as each other.

  The base member 400 is formed to be rotatable between a first rotation position and a second rotation position having a phase difference of about 90 ° from the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the direction of the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and in the second rotating position, the direction of the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. Is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display that displays a pattern or the like, is rotatably supported by a shaft, and has a display surface 523a facing the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11, and 12). ) And a posture in which the decorative surface 523b on the back side of the display surface 523a faces the front (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13, and 14).

  When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slid and displaced in a direction approaching each other and is arranged at the proximity position, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is arranged on the front of the third symbol display device 81, and thereby the third symbol is displayed. While the display device 81 is shielded so as to be invisible (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), when the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slid in the direction away from each other and arranged at the separated position, By retracting the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is made visible (FIGS. 8, 10, 12, and FIG. 14).

  Next, a detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a configuration for rotatably supporting the base member 400 of the slide unit SL with respect to the rear case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the rear case 300 and the base member 400.

  Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state where the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, FIG. 19 illustrates a state where the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position, and FIG. A transition state when rotating from one rotation position to a second rotation position or vice versa is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the rear case 300 includes a rotation driving mechanism for applying a rotation driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and A second wheel member 322 and covering members 331 to 334 for holding the respective wheel members 321 and 322 are provided.

  The rotary drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 311, a first gear (first transmission gear 313 a) meshed with the pinion gear 312, and a last gear (first transmission gear 313 a). A transmission gear train 313c) includes a transmission gear train meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed on the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300 at the upper right in front view. The second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members rotatably supported by a shaft 303 erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an outer peripheral edge of the base member 400. Are provided at predetermined intervals along the line. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located at two locations below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located at two locations above the base member 400 and two locations on the left and right sides. Each is arranged. Here, the detailed configuration of each wheel member 321 and 322 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 20A is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 17. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in a posture protruding toward the front side. Around the periphery 303, a first concave portion 301 b 1 and a second concave portion 301 b 2 that are concentric with the shaft 303 and circular in a front view are formed in the bottom wall portion 301.

  The first concave portion 301b1 and the second concave portion 301b2 are concave portions for receiving and housing the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and have an inner diameter of the second concave portion 301b2. , Are set smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a mistake in assembling the first wheel member 321 to the second concave portion 301b2.

  Each of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 is formed as a member having an H-shaped cross section in which grooves 321a, 322a having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed on the outer peripheral surface. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. Thus, the base member 400 is rotatably supported by the rear base 300 while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward in FIG. 20A) and the front-rear direction (left / right direction in FIG. 20A). it can.

  Note that the first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are arranged between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Thus, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that supports the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

  In the second wheel member 322, the outer diameter of the wall portion located on the front side (left side in FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inner diameter of the concave portion 301b2. Is done. In other words, the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322 is larger on the front wall than on the rear wall. Thereby, the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 can be ensured, and the durability can be improved, while suppressing the wrong mounting direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a relatively heavy slide mechanism 500 is disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 having the weight of the slide mechanism 500 is tilted forward to the front. However, since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and to the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall portion of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. This configuration is particularly effective for suppressing the forward leaning posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

  Returning to FIGS. 15 to 19, the description will be continued. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing a rectangular plate-like body having a circular opening in the center into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are arranged in front of the bottom wall part 301 of the rear case 300. . Thereby, the covering members 331 to 334 are covered on the front side of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the wheel members 321 and 322 are prevented from coming off from the shaft 303.

  The base member 400 is a disk-shaped member having a substantially rectangular opening 401 in the center when viewed from the front. The base member 400 is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge, and has the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 321 described above. A flange 402 inserted into the grooves 321a, 322a of the wheel member 322; and a last gear (third transmission) in the transmission gear train of the rotary drive mechanism, which is engraved on the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction. And a gear portion 403 meshed with the gear 313c).

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the forward direction from the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17, and the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. The rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise (right rotation direction in FIG. 17) when viewed from the front. When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 moves to the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state where the base member 400 is located at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is increased. The transmission to the gear portion 403 causes the base member 400 to rotate counterclockwise (left rotation direction in FIG. 19) when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17 through the state shown in FIG. You.

  In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 mainly abutting on the groove bottom of the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. In other words, since the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer peripheral surface at the groove bottom of the groove 321a are supported by rolling contact with each other, the contact surface is minimized, and the friction surface is supported with little friction. Thus, the output of the drive motor 311 required to rotationally drive the base member 400 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is disposed (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, the base member 400 is moved relative to the rear case 300 by the first rotation position and the second rotation position, as described above. 21 and 23, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position. FIGS. 26 and 27 show the liquid crystal display device 523 arranged at the separated position. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a folded state. FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail disposed on the front side of the cover member 420. 510, a slide member 520 provided on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to perform a slide displacement.

  The cover member 420 is a disc-shaped member having a substantially rectangular opening 421 in the center. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is placed on the front side of the base member 400 in a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. Are arranged (fixed).

  The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, when the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is disposed at the close position, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a position overlapping with the openings 401 and 421 in a front view, and can rotate without interfering with the cover member 420.

  Here, a detailed configuration of the slide drive mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIGS. 30, 32, and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33, and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

  In FIGS. 30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inwardly protruding position, which is a position for disposing the slide member 520 at the close position, is shown in FIGS. 34 and 35. 32 and 32, the transmission arm 437 is rotated from the inwardly protruding position to the outward inverting position or vice versa. The respective transition states at the time of the execution are illustrated. FIGS. 30 to 35 show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and schematically illustrate the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 using a two-dot chain line for easy understanding.

  The slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment is provided with a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for respectively driving the slide members 520. Therefore, both are given the same reference numerals, only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. A transmission gear 433 meshed with the rack gear 434a meshed with the transmission gear 433 is engraved on the outer peripheral side and a rack member 434 formed in a curved plate shape, and an inner peripheral side of the rack member 434 are formed. A transmission gear 435 meshed with a rack gear 434b engraved on the arm, a pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and a base end fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436. And a pair of transmission arms 437.

  Therefore, for example, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inwardly protruding position (the position where the tip side is directed to the opening 421 side of the cover member 420) shown in FIGS. Then, when the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, so that a pair of transmissions is performed. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their proximal ends.

  When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 go through the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and move to the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. , And is disposed at a position where the tip side faces the side opposite to the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

  On the other hand, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state where the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, and the rotation is transmitted via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. The rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, so that a pair of transmissions is performed. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their proximal ends. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the reverse direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inverting positions shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 via the states shown in FIGS.

  As will be described later, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably connected to the sliding groove 524a in the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated around the base end side. Then, the inner surface of the slide groove 524a in the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the distal end side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slid and displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

  In this case, in a configuration in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 is converted into the sliding displacement of the sliding member 520 using a linear rack member extending along the sliding direction of the sliding member 520, When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shapes of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the rear case 300 (outer wall portion 302). However, it cannot be rotated.

  When the linear rack member is accommodated in the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 so that the base member 400 can rotate with respect to the rear case 300, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 becomes short. In addition, the linear rack member is exposed from the opening 421 so as to be visible to the player, and the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 is also conceivable, but in this case, the disposition position of the drive motor 431 overlaps the movement locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, The sliding displacement amount of the member 520 becomes shorter.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc-shaped curved rack member 434 is arranged along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side (outside of the opening 421) of the cover member 420, and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is controlled by the rack member 434. And the rotation is converted to the rotation of the arm drive gear 436, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated, so that the base member 400 is moved relative to the rear case 300 while securing the slide displacement of the slide member 520. And the rack member 434 can be prevented from being exposed from the opening 421 to improve the appearance. Further, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (both sides) of the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured from this point.

  Returning to FIG. 24 to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520. When the slide rail 510 is expanded and contracted, the slide member 520 is moved relative to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 has a pair that supports both ends of the slide member 520 as one set, and the two sets have postures in which the directions of expansion and contraction are different from each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). They are arranged facing each other.

  Here, the detailed configurations of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded rear perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. 36 to 38, the transmission arm 437 is illustrated for easy understanding.

  In the present embodiment, two sets each including the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 are provided. However, these two sets are different from each other in that the distance between the pair of slide rails 510 in one set is equal to the pair of slides in the other set. Since they are substantially the same except that they are smaller than the facing distance of the rails 510, they are denoted by the same reference numerals, and only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. By providing a difference in the above-described facing distance, one set of slide rails 510 can be arranged between the other set of slide rails 510 facing each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to a base rail 511 provided on the front surface of the cover member 420 so as to be relatively displaceable in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base rail 511. And an end rail 513 connected to the front side of the intermediate rail 512 so as to be relatively displaceable in the longitudinal direction. That is, the base rail 511 and the front rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

  The slide member 520 includes a one-side guided member 521 and another-side guided member 522 in which the tip rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are respectively disposed on the back side, and the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connection frame 524 connecting the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 provided on the connection frame 524. And an opposing member 525 that is disposed to oppose.

  The one-side guided member 521 is divided into a rail-side member 521a on which the tip rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is disposed and a liquid-crystal-side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid-crystal display device 523. 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so that relative displacement is possible.

  More specifically, insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are formed at two positions on the rail-side member 521a, and a pair of cylindrical insertion pins 521b1 inserted into the two insertion holes 521a1 are paired with the liquid crystal-side member 521b. It is protruded. The center distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the center distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

  In this case, the axial directions of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 are orthogonal to the slide direction of the slide rail 510 and are parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed around the entire circumference between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1, and the gap can be relatively displaced in any direction (perpendicular to the axis) by the gap. it can.

  Note that a washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1, and the insertion pin 521b1 is prevented from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

  In this case, the thickness of the plate-shaped portion of the rail-side member 521a where the insertion hole 521a1 is formed is set to be smaller than the protrusion of the insertion pin 521b1. Thereby, the rail side member 521a can be relatively displaced with respect to the liquid crystal side member 521b also in the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can form a posture inclined with respect to the rail side member 521a with the other guided member 522 serving as a fulcrum. For example, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes the rail side member 521a in the direction of the slide displacement, and their opposing interval increases on the front side in the direction of the slide displacement (decreases on the rear side in the direction of the slide displacement). Relative displacement in form is acceptable. Accordingly, as described later, it is possible to easily suppress the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by the inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display, and one side is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a pattern or the like, and the other side is opposite to the one side. The other side is a decorative surface 523b on which the decoration is performed.

  In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with cylindrical rotation shafts 523c protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and each of the rotation shafts 523c is connected to one side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member. 522 are rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 via the rotation shaft 523c and the shaft support holes 521b2, 522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. Can be formed in a posture in which is directed to the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

  The axis of the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, in the liquid crystal display device 523, since the liquid crystal display is arranged, the display surface 523a side is made heavier than the decoration surface 523b side. Also, due to the components of the liquid crystal display and the asymmetric shape of the decorative surface 523b, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least to the display surface 523a side from the axis of the rotating shaft 523c. Therefore, an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is likely to be generated.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotational driving mechanism provided on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521. The rotation drive mechanism includes a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and meshed with the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523, and transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 to the liquid crystal display device 523 via each of the gears 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. .

  Note that the rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 such that their displacement (rotation) speed and displacement (rotation) timing (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same. Is done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant, regardless of whether the liquid crystal display device 523 faces the front surface of the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b.

  The connecting frame 524 is provided with a sliding groove 524a linearly extending along a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510, and the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. It is inserted as much as possible. Since the connection frame 524 is disposed on the one-side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal-side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the above-described slide drive mechanism, and the distal end thereof is formed in a sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid and displaced.

  The connection frame 524 connects the one-side guided member 521 (the liquid-crystal-side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, so that the whole of the liquid-crystal-side member 521b, the liquid-crystal display device 523, and the other-side member 522 are formed. Stiffness can be increased. This makes it easy to maintain a constant facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522, and facilitates smooth rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by the inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated.

  The opposing member 525 is a plate-shaped member that stands upright from the front of the connection frame, and has a predetermined distance (a surface connecting the display surface 523a and the decoration surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 (the surface of the liquid crystal display device 523). (Interval allowing rotation). A plurality of LEDs (producing means) are disposed on the facing member 525, and are formed so that light can be emitted toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which light emitted from the LED and reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 is visually recognized by the player from between the opposing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523.

  A structure in which the slide member 520 thus configured is slid and displaced by the slide drive mechanism (the transmission arm 437) will be described. FIGS. 39 (a), 40 (a) and 41 (a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39 (b), 40 (b) and 41 (b) show the slide member 520. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 39 shows a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position, FIG. 41 shows a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position, and FIG. Transition states when slidingly displaced to the separated position or vice versa are respectively illustrated. 39 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS.

  Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same speed of their displacement (slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and their displacement timing (start of displacement or stop of displacement). Is set (controlled) as follows. Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in a state where the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inwardly protruding positions (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is in a shortened state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the close position. Placed in When the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about the base end from this state, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connection frame 524, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 523 is slid in the direction in which the slide rail 510 is extended.

  When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated, and the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the outward reversal position as shown in FIG. 41 via the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). Then, the slide rail 510 is extended, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position.

  On the other hand, when the pair of transmission arms 437 is rotated in the opposite direction from the above-described case from the state shown in FIG. 41, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connection frame 524. Then, the liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced in a direction to shorten the slide rail 510. When the pair of transmission arms 437 is further rotated, and the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inwardly protruding position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 is shortened. State, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

  FIG. 42A is a reference diagram, and FIG. 42B is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500.

  In this embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is composed of two parts, a rail-side member 521a and a liquid-crystal-side member 521b, and these are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. However, FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as “reference structure”), the one-side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). The other configuration of the reference structure is the same as that of the present embodiment, so that the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed so as to be slidable by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 is rotated between the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522. And a liquid crystal display device 523 that is pivotally supported. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slidably displaced, so that a variety of effect operations can be increased. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decoration surface 523b can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one-side guided member X and the other-side guided member 522, the rotation starts or stops. The accompanying inertia force becomes parallel to the direction of the slide displacement, and the slide members (the one-side guided member X, the other-side guided member 522, and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertia force is applied cause the slide rail 510 to expand and contract. , The slide is displaced. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the liquid crystal display device 523 stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid-crystal-side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are connected to be relatively displaceable. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (the right side in FIG. 42B) disposed on the side guided member 521 and the side disposed on the other side guided member 522 (FIG. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 (42 (b) left side) can be made different.

  Accordingly, when an inertial force is applied to start or stop the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the one guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 is moved to the other displaced member. The liquid crystal display device 523 can be made easier to displace than the 522 side, and can have a displacement component in a direction (left direction in FIG. 42 (b)) orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42 (b)). . Therefore, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) pressing on the slide rail 510 (that is, restricting expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). 520 can be suppressed from being slid. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of the slide displacement (the vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

  In this case, in this embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (the right side in FIG. 42B) provided on the one-side guided member 521 is provided on the other-side guided member 522. A configuration in which the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the installation side (the left side in FIG. 42 (b)). The rotary drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) is disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b (see FIG. 38). That is, one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510, the rotation drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight). As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is disposed with its drive shaft directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and its main body directed in a direction away from the liquid crystal display device 523. In addition, the position of the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be arranged at a position farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus that is farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

  This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is the force (braking force) pressing the slide rail 510, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

  FIG. 43A is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500 in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position, and FIG. 43B is a diagram illustrating the liquid crystal display device 523 at the close position. It is the front schematic diagram which showed typically the slide mechanism 500 in the arrange | positioned state.

  Here, in the above-described reference structure (see FIG. 42A), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in the direction of approaching each other and arranged in the proximity position, they abut at the proximity position without any gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431 and the respective gears 432, 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for slidingly displacing the liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, causing damage thereto.

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a margin at a position where the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in consideration of a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, or a control tolerance (when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are close to each other). When a sufficient gap is set between the two so that they do not touch each other), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side is visually recognized by the player from the gap), and the appearance (effect effect) Causes deterioration.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the rail-side member 521a and the liquid-crystal-side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. The slide members 520 thus formed are arranged to face each other in a staggered posture while being connected as much as possible. That is, one side guided member 521 of one slide member 520 is connected to the other side guided member 522 of the other slide member 520, and the other side guided member 522 of one slide member 520 is connected to one side of the other slide member 520. The guide members 521 are disposed to face each other.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 43B, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in a direction in which they come close to each other, and the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at one of the close positions, one and the other slide members 520 have one of them. When the side guided member 521 is relatively displaced (the liquid crystal side member 521b retreats with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other guided member 522 of the other (the other and one) sliding member 520 can be received. (The one and the other liquid crystal display devices 523 can be in a posture inclined with respect to the direction of the sliding displacement, respectively).

  Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 contact each other at the close position, damage to the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431, the respective gears 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed, and the position at which the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped is set closer. Can be set to position. As a result, at the close position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (producing effect) can be improved accordingly.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a detection target is disposed on the other-side guided member 522, and a detection sensor for detecting the detection target is disposed on the cover member 420. Is detected by the detection sensor, it is detected that the slide member 520 has been slid to the predetermined position. Therefore, even when the posture of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, the displacement of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor) can be suppressed. As a result, the position of the slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of a slide rail 510 and a slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration). The case has been described where the two sets are opposed to each other in a position facing each other (that is, the phases are shifted by 180 °). However, the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment includes a slide member 520 and a slide member 2520, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are arranged to face each other in a facing posture. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  44 and 45 are schematic front views schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a reference diagram, and is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment. In FIG. 44, the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is shown. In FIG. 45, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. In addition, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position is illustrated in each figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, as in the case of the first embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 have different directions of expansion and contraction (that is, a phase of 180). ° (different) posture.

  In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is provided on one of the slide rails 510 (the upper side in FIGS. 44 and 45), as in the first embodiment. A slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of the other set (the lower side in FIGS. 44 and 45).

  In the slide member 2520, the positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, one side guided member 521 of one set of slide members 520 is one side guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 2520, and the other side guided member 522 of one set of slide members 520 is The other guided member 522 of the other set of slide members 2520 is disposed to face each other.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, one set of the slide members 520 and the other set of the slide members 2520 have the slide displacement of the two members 520, 2520 in plan view shown in FIGS. Are arranged in a position symmetrical with respect to an imaginary line which is located at the center in the direction of and is perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, as described above, two sets having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). Since they are arranged to face each other in the posture, the one-side guided member 521 in one set of the sliding members 520 is connected to the other-side guided member 522 in the other set of the sliding members 2520 and the other side of the one set of the sliding members 520. The guided member 522 is disposed to face the one-side guided member 521 of the other set of the sliding members 2520, respectively.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, one set of the slide members 520 and the other set of the slide members 520 are located at the center in the direction of the slide displacement of the two members 520 in the plan view shown in FIG. And is disposed in a point-symmetrical position with respect to a virtual point located at the center in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (that is, the center of rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300). You.

  Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, when an inertial force caused by the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the direction of the slide displacement generated in one set of the slide members 520 is orthogonal. And the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are alternately oriented (point-symmetrical directions, the base member 400 and the cover member 420). 46, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated with respect to the rear case 300 in the direction of arrow R in FIG. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 with the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

  On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the inertia force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one of the slides The displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of the slide members 2520 have the same direction (the direction of line symmetry). ).

  Accordingly, since the rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 2500, and illustrates a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is located at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45), the one-side guided member 521 in one set of the slide members 520 and the other set And the one-side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 are disposed on the right side in front view.

  In this case, the second rotation position of the base member 400 is a position rotated 90 ° clockwise (clockwise) in front view from the first rotation position (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position (that is, a state where the sliding displacement direction of the sliding members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 47)). The one-side guided member 521 of one set of the slide members 520 and the one-side guided member 521 of the other set of the slide members 2520 are respectively disposed on the lower side in the front view (the lower side in the vertical direction). Can be.

  Thus, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 47, when the inertial force accompanying the start of the slide displacement or the stop of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement is performed. (A displacement component in a direction of pressing the slide members 520 and 2520 against the slide rail 510 (regulating the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510)) in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the vertical direction (the direction opposite to the direction of gravity, FIG. 47 upward).

  As a result, when the slide member 520 (the liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the above-described direction, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity is reduced. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement can be suppressed.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position (a state where the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid and displaced in the horizontal direction), the one-side guided member 521 becomes the other-side guided member 522. Although the case where it is arranged vertically below has been described, the one guided member 521 of the third embodiment is arranged vertically above the other guided member 522. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 48, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 49, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. In addition, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position is illustrated in each figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 °. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is provided on the slide rail 510 of one set (the upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49), and the other set (FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is provided on the slide rail 510 on the lower side.

  That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is located at the first rotation position, the one-side guided member 521 in one set of the slide members 2520 and the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of the slide members 520. The guide members 521 are respectively disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

  Similarly to the case of the second embodiment, the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment configured as described above, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 acts, The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the set of slide members 2520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 have the same direction (line). (Symmetrical direction).

  Accordingly, since the rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the rear case 300 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300.

  FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 3500, and illustrates a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is located at the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one-side guided member 521 in one set of the slide members 2520 and the other set And the one-side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 are disposed on the left side in front view.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in a state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, a state where the direction of the slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 50)). The one-side guided member 521 of one set of the slide members 2520 and the one-side guided member 521 of the other set of the slide members 520 can be disposed on the upper side in the front view (upper side in the vertical direction). .

  Accordingly, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47, when an inertial force is generated due to the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the slide displacement is reduced. A displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the direction (a displacement component that generates a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be a vertically downward direction (gravity direction, lower side in FIG. 50). Thereby, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, the lifting of the slide member 520 can be suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. Further, it is possible to prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling due to the lifting.

  In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 is provided with a rotation drive unit (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510, the rotation drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight). As a result, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, the lifting of the slide member 520 can be easily suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling accompanying the lifting.

  In addition, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged with its drive shaft directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body portion oriented in a direction away from the liquid crystal display device 523. Can be arranged at a position farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus that is farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

  This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is the force (braking force) pressing the slide rail 510, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, the lifting of the slide member 520 can be easily suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to rattling accompanying the lifting.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the center in the width direction has been described, but the rotation axis 4523c of the fourth embodiment is located at a position eccentric in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. It is arranged in. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52A is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 4500 in a state where the liquid crystal surface 523a faces the front side, and FIG. 52B illustrates the decoration mechanism 523b facing the front side. FIG. 18 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 in the folded state. FIGS. 52A and 52B illustrate a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is disposed at the separated position.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a columnar rotating shaft 4523c protrudes from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523, The rotating shaft 4523c is rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c of the one-side guided member 4521 (the liquid crystal side member 4521b) and the other-side guided member 4522.

  That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 4521 and the other-side guided member 4522 via the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. Can be formed in a posture in which is facing the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is facing the front side.

  In this case, the formation position of the rotary shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c is more distant from the facing member 525 along the direction of sliding displacement than the formation position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation axis 523c is disposed at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas the rotation axis 4523c in the fourth embodiment is arranged in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (see FIG. ) And FIG. 52B (vertical direction).

  In the rotary drive mechanism according to the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are different from the rotary drive mechanism according to the first embodiment by the amount that the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. A third gear 4535 is additionally arranged between the second gear 4535 and the third gear 4535.

  Here, as described above, the opposing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (the display surface 523a and the decoration surface 523b are connected to each other). The light is emitted from the LED, and the light reflected from the side of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is reflected from the side of the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 from the opposing space (gap). It is possible to perform an effect to make it visually recognized by a person.

  Therefore, if the interval (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 is small, a space (gap) for passing the light reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 cannot be secured, and the light is effectively provided to the player. I cannot see it.

  In this case, the opposing interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the interval in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) is from the opposing interval via the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420. Since the player can visually recognize the device 81, it is preferable that the device 81 can be secured to the maximum. On the other hand, the opposing interval between the pair of opposing members 525 (the interval in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) must be a size that can be accommodated between the opposing outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300 due to the restriction of the arrangement space. Cannot be expanded.

  Therefore, by increasing the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 and securing an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 between the facing surfaces, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the gap (gap) is reduced, it is difficult to secure a gap for irradiating, reflecting, or passing the LED light. On the other hand, in order to secure such a gap, the facing gap between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is reduced. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the formation position of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c is eccentric to one side in the direction of the slide displacement, and therefore, according to the rotation position of the liquid crystal display device 4523. In addition, the distance (gap) between the opposing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 4523 can be increased or decreased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced. . Accordingly, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of projection of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced, and as a result, the player can adjust the third symbol display device. A visible area for visually recognizing 81 can be secured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the decoration surface 523b faces the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased. . Therefore, a space (gap) for passing light emitted from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected on the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can be secured, and as a result, the space between the facing of the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (gap). Thus, the effect of making the player visually recognize can be effectively performed.

  Further, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to arrange the facing member 525 at a position away from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, to increase the spacing between the pair of facing members 525). Therefore, the size of the slide mechanism 4500 can be reduced. That is, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of the light emitted from the LED are compatible, while the slide mechanism 4500 can be accommodated between the outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300. Can be.

  Next, a method of suppressing the driving force required for rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa will be described.

  FIGS. 53A and 53B are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are moved to the close position. To place. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53 (a)) has the display surface 523a in a posture facing the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53 (a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

  Thus, the whole of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be disposed at a position eccentric upward from the center in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G is positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400. Can be done.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 53 (a)) as viewed from the front, so that the first rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (a) is changed to the second rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (b). When rotating, the locus of movement of the center of gravity G (illustrated by a broken arrow in FIG. 53B) can be a locus that moves downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be made to act as the force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for rotating the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is moved to the close position. To place. In this case, while the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (the side that moves in the direction of gravity with the rotation to the first rotation position, the left side in FIG. 54A) has the display surface 523a facing the front side, The liquid crystal display device 4523 on the other side (the side that moves to the opposite side to the direction of gravity with the rotation to the first rotation position, the right side in FIG. 54A) has the decoration surface 523b facing the front.

  Thereby, the whole of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the position of the center of gravity G) is a position distant from the rotation center of the base member 400 and eccentric to a side that moves in the direction of gravity with the subsequent rotation ( 54 (a) (left side).

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 54 (a) counterclockwise), and the first rotation shown in FIG. 54 (b) is changed from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54 (a). When rotating to the position, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (illustrated by a broken arrow in FIG. 54B) can be a locus moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be made to act as the force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for rotating the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. FIG. 56 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 along the line LVI-LVI in FIG. 55 (b), and FIG. 57 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56 (b). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 formed of a resin material and forming a passage through which game balls flow. The passage member 5600 includes a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (the left-right direction in FIG. 55B) and a front side (a front side of the drawing 55 (b)) of the rolling plate 5610. A front wall portion 5620 provided, a rear wall portion 5630 provided on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side in FIG. 55B), and a part of the rear wall portion 5630 is provided on the back side. An overhang wall portion 5640 formed by overhang is mainly provided.

  The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface is a rolling surface of a game ball, and includes a first portion formed to be inclined downward from an end in the width direction of the game board 13 and a first portion of the first portion. A W-shaped rolling surface as viewed from the front is formed from the second portion that is inclined upward from the end on the downward inclined side toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13.

  On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, a concave portion is formed at a connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion, and the lowering portion is lowered toward the front side (front side in FIG. 55 (b)). A recessed portion 5611 that is inclined and a recessed portion 5612 that is recessed at the uppermost portion of the second portion and that is inclined downward toward the rear side (the depth side in the drawing of FIG. 55B) are provided.

  The front wall portion 5620 is provided upright above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and suppresses a game ball from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is cut out at a portion corresponding to the concave portion 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, and the game ball received in the concave portion 5611 can be dropped.

  The overhang wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for allowing game balls rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and The game ball received by the recess 5612 by rolling the plate 5610 is received by the overhang wall portion 5640.

  Here, an operation unit 200 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, when the overhanging wall portion 5640 extends from the back side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, the operation unit 200 (the slide unit SL) is used to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640. ), The movable range is limited, and the staging effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed in a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width between the inner wall surfaces (the left-right dimension in FIG. 57) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is also set to be slightly larger, while the depth dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 57) from the front to the inner wall surface of the rear wall portion 5630 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by an imaginary plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630, with the arc-shaped top in the overhanging direction (the right side in FIG. 56, the upper side in FIG. 57). In the chamfered portion, an opening 5641 whose width (the left-right dimension in FIG. 57) is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed.

  That is, the game ball can pass (flow down) through the passage formed by the overhanging wall portion 5640 in a state where a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening portion 5641 to the outside. In comparison with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed to have a size surrounding the side, the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 toward the back side can be suppressed. Therefore, a space for disposing the operation unit 200 and a movable range of the slide unit SL can be secured accordingly.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a passage member 6600 according to the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the overhang wall portion 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions standing upright from the back wall portion 5630 and a wall portion connecting the upstanding tips of the pair of wall portions. , And an opening 6641 is formed in the wall of the projecting tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the U-shaped cross section.

  The opening 6641 is formed in a form in which the width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 58) decreases from the inner wall surface side to the outer wall surface side of the overhang wall portion 6640. That is, the overhang wall portion 6640 has an inner peripheral surface formed as an inclined surface. Thereby, the projecting amount by which a part of the game ball is projected from the opening 6641 to the outside is enlarged, and the overhanging dimension L2 of the overhanging wall 5640 can be suppressed, while the peripheral edge of the opening 6641 (with the inclined surface). ), The rigidity of the overhanging wall portion 6640 can be ensured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 on the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 5640 and the opening The angle of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridge line portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5641 abuts on the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to secure a protruding amount that allows a part of the game ball to protrude from the opening 6641 to the outside, and to suppress receiving the target object on the tip side of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) ( That is, the game ball is received by the ridge line portion S having relatively high rigidity), and breakage of the overhanging wall portion 6640 (the peripheral edge of the opening 6641) can be suppressed.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), a passage member 7600 according to the seventh embodiment includes a front wall portion 7651, a rear wall portion 7652 arranged opposite to the front wall portion 7651, and a front surface portion thereof. It has side wall portions 7653 disposed on both sides of the wall portion 7651 and the rear wall portion 7652, respectively, and forms a passage through which the game sphere flows down by a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by the wall portions 7651 to 7653. .

  Here, the passage member 7600 protrudes a part of the front wall portion 7651 and the rear wall portion 7652 (the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) toward the rear wall portion, so that the front inner peripheral wall portion is formed. A bent passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage where the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent and the outer peripheral side of the passage where the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent are formed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an opening 7654 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall 7651a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force (rightward in FIG. 59 (a)) acting on the game ball when passing through the curved passage. Note that the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball to the outside from the opening 7654, not only the overhang dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed, but also the damage and wear of the passage member 7600 can be suppressed. Easy to do.

  That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the curved passage (the right direction in FIG. 59A), the opening 7654 is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a having the opening portion 7654 which is not formed with the opening and having relatively high rigidity, and can prevent the game ball from being pressed against the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a by centrifugal force. . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 and wear at the peripheral edge of the opening portion 7654, which are relatively low in rigidity due to the formation of the opening portion 7654.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 60, the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, similarly to the case of the seventh embodiment, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall 7651 (front inner peripheral wall 7651a) and a rear wall 7652 (rear outer peripheral wall 7652a). And a side wall 7653 to form a curved passage having a substantially rectangular cross section. In this embodiment, an opening 8654 is formed in the outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. The opening 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball to the outside from the opening 8654, the overhang dimension L4 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set to a position overlapping the range Rg, which is a partial displacement trajectory of the game ball protruding from the opening 8654. Thereby, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the overhang dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the effect produced by the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the passage member 8600, a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 that detect the passage of a game ball are disposed upstream and downstream of the opening 8654, respectively. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least the presence of the game ball in the passage of the passage member 8600, and thus, a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654. It can be understood that the state is not performed.

  Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is moved to the range Rg only while it is determined that at least a part of the game ball is not protruding from the opening 8654. By controlling such that the slide unit SL is displaced to a position overlapping with the above, interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball can be avoided.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slid and displaced by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pair of rod-like members (one side member and the other side) are used. Are provided, and the one-side guided member 521 (rail-side member 521a) and the other-side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rods, so that the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are moved. It may be a sliding displacement.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the configuration that enables relative displacement between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b in the one side guided member 521 is formed by the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. The configuration may be such that relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentric to at least the display surface 523a side from the axis of the rotation shaft 523c has been described, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may coincide with the axis of the rotation shaft 523c.

  Further, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotating shaft 523c (the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the longitudinal direction, or the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. It may be located eccentric to one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, it is preferable that the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c be eccentric to the side of the rotation drive mechanism that is close to the drive motor 531. This is because the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be used as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are disposed so as to be slidable via the slide rails 510 with respect to the cover member 420 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A member having another displacement mode (displacement member) may be provided.

  For example, a pair of rotating bodies rotatably supported by the cover member 420 with a rotation axis in the same direction as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 may be provided. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged point-symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300, and the rotation directions of both are opposite. This makes it possible to cancel the inertial force caused by the start or stop of the rotation of the pair of rotators, thereby suppressing the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from rotating with respect to the rear case 300. That is, while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the rear case 300, it is possible to easily rotate only the pair of rotating bodies.

  In the above-described second embodiment, a case has been described where the rotary drive mechanism (drive motor 531, pinion gear 532, first gear 533, and second gear 534) is disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521 b of the one-side guided member 521. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and such a rotation drive mechanism may be provided on the other-side guided member 521.

  In this case, in a state where the base member 400 is located at the second rotation position, when the inertial force accompanying the start of the slide displacement or the stop of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the liquid crystal display device 523 It is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the sliding member 520 (the liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction while the liquid crystal display device 523 can be prevented from being slid by the inertia force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the sliding displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as passages of game balls flowing down the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members may be used as target objects. It is good. For example, a spherical member used for an effect outside the game area may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while overlapping the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A part may be displaced from the opening 8654 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a to a position where it is inserted into the inside of the passage member 8600. In this case, the displacement area of the slide unit SL can be maximized, and the effect of the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, the displacement member can be displaced further to the front side, and the force can be given by bringing the displacement member closer to the player.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg, the portion overlapping the rear surface of the rear outer wall 7652a of the slide unit SL with the range Rg can be independently displaced. When interference with a game ball is predicted as a variable structure, the interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only the variable structure portion. Thereby, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to promptly take measures to suppress the interference with the game ball.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, an over-winning effect is displayed when a gaming ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that an over-prize has been won during the jackpot game, so that a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  As the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the number of over-winning game balls. Further, the effect may be varied according to the number of over-winning game balls. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  In the first control example, as the over-winning effect, the over-winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed according to the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the selection ratio of the over prize winning effect is configured to be different. Thereby, even if the jackpot game is performed for a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, a character string indicating right-handing (right-handed, right-handed, right-handed) is configured to be displayed circumferentially. Thereby, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the player is in a gaming state in which right-handing is performed.

  Note that a display suggesting right-handing may be performed, and a sound suggesting right-handing (for example, a voice saying “Please right-hand”) may be output. Thereby, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to appropriately suggest (notify) that the player is in a gaming state in which the player makes a right-handed game.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured.

  As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 performs an inversion operation and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, it is possible to grasp the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol by visually checking the sub LED. Can provide a game machine that is easy for players to understand.

  In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is changed according to the displacement. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect, and to improve the interest of the player. Further, even if a part or the whole of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

  In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slid) up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), and when they are driven left and right (slide). ) (Ie, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect, and to improve the interest of the player.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62A, data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

  In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. More specifically, the image data in the region from (0,0) to (X, Y1) is used for image data of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by using image data represented by coordinates (0,0) to (X, Y3). The image data in the region from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the upper display surface 523a, and the image data in the region from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the effect content at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to the close positions, and the button with the character “PUSH” drawn on the lower display surface 523a2 is displayed. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the slide movement. An effect is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

  Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, an effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (the upper display surface 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2) and the third symbol display device 81 provided on the slide member 520 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed downward. By sliding (downward from the viewpoint in FIG. 63), the display area used for effect display is enlarged, and the pattern (a pattern imitating “fish” in FIG. 63) is enlarged using the enlarged display area. The effect display is performed to make the number of symbols increase.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to display various types of symbols in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing a display area in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a position where they come into contact with each other. The display is controlled to display the display surface 523a2.

  Even in such a case, display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 uses display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the data amount can be reduced.

  In the present control example, a configuration is used in which the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523. However, other configurations may be used. Even if the display area in which the information (for example, the display of the number of reserved storages or the display of the abnormality) related to the game to be displayed is displayed becomes visible even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 moves to any position. Good.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding movement from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has started sliding from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63 (b)) and moves downward. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63B). On the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid, the same display objects (upper half and lower half of the design) as those in FIG. 63A are displayed. This can be realized by moving the display position of the display object according to the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. The third symbol display device 81 displays a symbol corresponding to the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the third symbol display. The symbols displayed on the display surface of the device 81 are displayed. From the near side (the visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (the lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (the upper symbol), the third symbol display device 81 Are displayed in the order of the display surface (middle symbol).

  In the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), since most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, and lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, it is clear which symbol is displayed to the player. Is in a state that is difficult to grasp. In this state, since the symbols (medium symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are superimposed so as to be most difficult to recognize, what kind of symbol appears last to the player is the symbol. Can be executed while expecting the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Next, a state in which the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has further progressed from the state of FIG. 63 (b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 64 (b) is a view showing the state shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the state where slide movement of sub liquid crystal display 523 advanced further.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually enlarged. Even in this state, the same display objects (the upper half and the lower half of the design) as those in FIG. 63A are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid.

  Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed such that the overlap of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol gradually decreases. With such a configuration, the display of the display data corresponding to the specific display object (the display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63A) is performed for the display of the upper display 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. It is only necessary to execute the control of moving the position in accordance with the sliding movement of each display surface, and there is an effect that the load of the display control can be reduced.

  Further, the effect display for gradually reducing the overlapping of the symbols is simply fixed by actually moving the display surfaces (the upper display 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). There is an effect that the sense of discomfort given to the player can be suppressed as compared with the case where the execution is performed on the display surface.

  In this case, the timing at which each display surface (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) slides is changed, or the speed at which the slide surfaces are moved is changed. Display control may be performed. Thereby, there is an effect that the effect of rendering can be further enhanced.

  Next, a state where the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has further progressed from the state of FIG. 64B will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 65 (b) shows a state from the state shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the state where slide movement of sub liquid crystal display 523 advanced further.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides to the position shown in FIG. 65 (a), a part of the mode indicating the number attached to the middle symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves to the state of FIG. 65 (b), the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol are completely displayed (each display surface is separated to the maximum). Slides to the position). In this state, by visually recognizing the mode indicating the number attached to the middle symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the current display effect can be grasped.

  In the present control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are executed. , May be used in addition to the above. For example, after displaying in a third symbol that a special symbol has won a jackpot, it is used for a technique (so-called stochastic promotion effect) of notifying whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot or a certain jackpot using a staging display. May be.

  Next, display contents when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 abut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are left and right. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of contact | abutting in a direction.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66A to the state shown in FIG. 66B, the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is changed to the sub position. By performing correction in accordance with the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523, the same display mode as before rotation can be displayed. In this case as well, since the display data displayed on each display surface uses the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to separately provide display data, and the data amount can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  Next, an inversion operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, as described above, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible, and the above-described display surfaces (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) are provided on one surface side, and on the other surface side. Are provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1, lower decorative surface 523b2).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 68, a description will be given of an effect mode in a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted at a position covering the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 67A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from a state in which the display surface faces the front side, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the decorative surface has begun to turn (a decorative surface has begun to turn to the front side). The sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state where most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side is concealed, and the main effect is switched to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 instead of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. On the lower part of the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative symbol Z indicating that the special symbol is being changed and displayed is displayed. On the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z on the front side is displayed. The sub LED 290 is arranged at a position corresponding to the sub LED 290. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 face the front side, respectively. By inverting, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected in parallel (contacted and arranged)) to form an apple pattern and form the character "CHANCE". It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is decorated with a corrugated shape, and four LEDs are arranged at the tip of each apple. Among them, the lowermost LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is configured by the sub LED 290. FIG. 68A shows a state where the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68B shows a state where the sub LED is turned on.

  With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is inverted and the display surface cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right strike notification mode, which is a mode of suggesting a launch position of a game ball during a jackpot game, will be described. FIG. 69 (a) shows a right strike notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the big hit game. The character “Right strike” is displayed in a three-circle (ring shape) curve, and during the big hit game, this character is displayed rotated to the right. In the present control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured such that a game ball flowing down the right side (right side flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 has a game ball flowing down the left side (left side flow path) of the third symbol display device 81. The game ball is arranged at a position where it is easier to win than the ball (lower right side of the game area). Thereby, the player normally operates the handle by operating the steering wheel so as to have a left-handed firing intensity in which the game ball is passed through the left channel and the game is performed so as to make the first starting port 64 win. Although the ball is fired, during the big hit game, the player operates the handle so that the shooting intensity is such that the game ball passes through the right flow path and plays the game.

  Here, the right-handed notification mode is displayed to notify that the steering wheel is operated at the firing intensity at which the game ball passes through the right-hand channel, and that the character “right-handed” rotates clockwise to the right-hand channel. And the turning direction of the steering wheel are notified at the same time.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game, and the third symbol display device 81 is concealed. , A right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. FIG. 69C is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated rightward. In this case, the image is displayed at the lower right of the upper display surface 523a1 (FIG. 69 (b) and the actual display position are not changed). Also in this case, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the right-handed character display direction and the character rotation display direction.

  As described above, in the present control example, the right-handed character display is rotated and displayed in a ring shape, so that the correct position can be notified without changing the display mode even if the displayed display surface is rotated. Can be. Therefore, the load of the display control process can be reduced. Further, the data amount can be reduced as compared with the case where various types of right-handed notification modes are prepared.

  In the present control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed by characters, but a ring-shaped symbol or a symbol imitating a game ball may be rotated. Furthermore, you may rotate and display the pattern which imitated the handle | steering-wheel which changes the firing intensity of a game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a description will be given of a modified example of the right strike notification mode in this control example. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the right-handed notification mode. In the present modified example, a change is made in that three arrow symbols curved in the right direction are added in the shape of a ring on the back side of the right-handed character display.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a display area in the right-handed notification mode. The right strike notification mode is displayed in a display area configured in a ring shape. This display area is divided into three areas every 120 degrees from the center, and includes a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. The first area α is an area in which an arrow symbol curved to the right is displayed by rotating to the right. In the second area β and the third area γ, “right-handed” characters follow the ring shape, respectively. It is displayed curved. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the rotated arrow symbol, and the rotated arrow symbol is displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. Also, three arrow symbols are set, and when one arrow symbol moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. I have. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is set variably according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a display mode in the case where the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the right-handed character display layer in the layer of the first area α is positioned below the arrow symbol. Is set. Therefore, an arrow symbol is displayed in the first area α, and a right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees to the right. In this case, the character display layer in the third area β is set below the arrow symbol layer, and the character display layer in the first area α is set above the arrow symbol layer.

  With this configuration, a right-pointing arrow symbol is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, so that the player can be notified of the correct position of the right channel. In the present modification, the position at which the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the setting of the layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to change by rotating (rotating according to the amount of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523).

  Next, details for setting the effects described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid, the effect of correcting the display position of the symbol in accordance with the amount of the slid movement is performed.

  Specifically, in response to the upper display surface 523a1 being changed in the upward direction from FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (b), the symbol 2 is displayed based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid. The display coordinates of (upper symbol) are corrected upward.

  Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being changed in the downward direction, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected in the downward direction based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 is slid.

  In this way, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount by which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the symbol spreads in unison as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides. The effect can be displayed.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol execution area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning opening 64 including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) are provided. Is provided with a second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the winning of the first prize, and in each of these areas, a first hit is performed in accordance with the timing of entering the first prize opening 64a or the second prize opening 64b. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a general-purpose execution area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 of (2).

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 is displayed at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. In addition, the first random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of being a big hit in the special symbol (the special symbol is higher than the low probability). ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “0 to 9”. It is determined whether or not there is, and if any of “0 to 9”, it is determined to be a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “9”. If the value is “9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt processing in the present control example), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one when the special symbol is hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol. Is stored in the first random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  In addition, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random value of the big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability are duplicated values. It is also possible to set a random value for each of the jackpots so as not to cause the hit. If there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state), by changing the random number value of the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot is obtained. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any one of “0 to 29” is “big hit A”. If the random number is any one of “30 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. In the present control example, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different big hit types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type that is executed with a larger number of rounds, the hit in the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to make the winning in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that he wants to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer time.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "Completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 in the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 64.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability cases and a special symbol for low-probability cases. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as small as 0 to 79 for low probability use. Is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely off”.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, and various “variance of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for deviation. , A variety of “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined as the variation pattern of the jackpot A. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). Although not shown, a variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio ramp control device 113, and a more detailed variation corresponding to the type of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that can hit the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240, and the total number of the random numbers that are the big hits is 24. Therefore, the probability of the normal symbol being hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, a symbol “○” is displayed, and the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ordinary symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to “0.2 times × 1 time”. Is released, but the release time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random number values to be hit is 200 out of the total of 240 random numbers, so that the probability of the hit to the normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, a symbol “○” is displayed, and the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened “1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, from “30 seconds to 3 seconds”, as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the motorized accessory 640a is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is only “1 second × 2 times” when the ordinary symbol is hit. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 93).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of a display result on a second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first random number selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. I have.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (a)) is a table in which the value of the random number which is the big hit of the special symbol is defined as described above. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit random number table 202a includes a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at a low probability of a special symbol, and a special symbol at a high probability of a special symbol. And a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of a high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a large jackpot, and the number of the jackpot determination values (random numbers) is different. In this way, by changing the number of determination values (random numbers) to be a big hit, the probability of a big hit is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73B) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, and “50-99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B.

  Here, as described above, the “big hit A” is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable prize device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, a lottery to determine whether or not to enter the probability change state). Is executed), but in the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery for determining whether or not the state is the probability change state is not performed).

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5-28 at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol). In the case of, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, a symbol “O” is lit as a stopped symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device (not shown) ends. In addition to the display, the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74 (b)), an out-of-use (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74 (c)), At least a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74 (d)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table and the like in the time-saving gaming state are also set.

  With reference to FIG. 74 (b), the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 74 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). With respect to the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. Is selected from the change pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 74 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (the fluctuation time) is set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type and obtains it from the out-of-office (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be released when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from being prolonged at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot is prolonged from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, an ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probable change valid flag 203q, a probable change valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, an under-time counter 203t, a sign flag 203u, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. , The respective values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on the winning are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Of the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored. This is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 640 (for the above-mentioned special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a). The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in that the second special symbol is changed, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant areas of the (area), the areas are sequentially stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, the special value 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases to 1 to a maximum value of 4. This is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second winning port 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special value 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4. This is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 85).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is held) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the first special symbol N2) is Then, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to execute the main control device. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in 110 itself. As a result, the number of balls to be changed, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the actual deviated display shows a deviation from the held ball count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is configured to display the number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball through the ordinary starting port 67. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of retained balls in the fluctuation display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

  If the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of changing display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. Then, the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90). : No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is the probability change game state, and when OFF, it indicates that the game state is the low probability game state (including the time saving game state). In this control example, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probable change game state is determined by whether or not a game ball has passed the probable change switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the fact that the probability change flag 203g is set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probability change switch 65a5 determines whether or not the power has passed before the power is turned off. 203h may be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch 65a5 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a value of a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds with the jackpot A in this control example). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203s described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is incremented by one each time the probability variable switch 65a5 is passed and updated (see S1511 in FIG. 98). In addition, after performing a process of checking whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1611 in FIG. 99). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game is incremented by one and updated (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the positive variable passing counter 203i) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, at the big hit A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and at the big hit B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round in the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit B (see S1202 in FIG. 95). . On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Also, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning to the positive change switch 65a5 according to the type of the big hit.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this control example, a voice of "looking at the liquid crystal") to attract the player's attention. In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have elapsed in the variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one by the process of S1402 of the notification process (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, a notification command output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the sound.

  With this configuration, the sound “look at the liquid crystal” is output before the start of the thirteenth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to look at the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is information, is displayed. In the thirteenth round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, and if the operation is watched by the player, the type of the jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player having the expectation that the probability change game state is given until the end of the big hit game, the player controls the movement of the switching member 65h (the flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 by the player. An informational production that makes it difficult to see is being performed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval. Is performed. Thus, after the interval effect has been executed, the player can be attracted to the displayed content displayed, and the player can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to be shown, thereby distracting the player from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the device 65 that the player's hand is held, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by informing the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 and the like. Furthermore, during the 12th round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to notify the user of reading with a mobile phone, thereby distracting the player's attention. In this control example, the effect of distracting the attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is determined whether the hit is the big hit A or the big hit B based on the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether or not the time required to discharge the game ball in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter of.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is a time required for discharging the game balls that have won the variable prize device 65 when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is closed after the completion of one preset round. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In the present control example, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance to the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p (3 seconds in the present control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins are equal ( S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the thirteenth round, so that the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual game. In addition, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball to the certainty changing switch 65a5.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 65a5. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper provision of the certain game state.

  The probability change valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that has finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. This indicates that the appropriate time has not elapsed. In other words, this indicates a period in which a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

  The probable change valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203q was set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the certainty change valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period required for normal passage through the certainty change switch 65a5. In the present control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is one second. The upper limit value of the probable change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even after passing through the probable change switch 65a5, it is determined to be illegal and not to be passed.

  Thereby, the switching member 65h is incorrectly changed to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65a5, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65a5 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5, It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraudulent detection that a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable prize device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

  The time reduction counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction gaming state. If the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203t. That is, in the present control example, if the probability change game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

  The prize flag 203u is obtained as prize information which is a big hit when the game is shifted to the probable change game state, and the prize information which has already been reserved (the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). This is a flag indicating that the winning information which is a jackpot A (that is, the game may shift to the probability-change gaming state) is stored in the information. This sign flag 203u changes in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 88) based on the winning information when the winning information that becomes a big hit when the game is shifted to the probable change gaming state is obtained (S507: Yes in FIG. 88). Is determined to be on when it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is in the certainty-variable game state when the game is started (ie, there is winning information that will be a jackpot A by then) (S508: Yes in FIG. 88). You. Then, a winning information command indicating that the sign flag 203u has been turned on is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S511 in FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the big hit game, when the probable change flag 203g is set to on (that is, when shifting to the probable change game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set to off. Although illustration is omitted, in the ending process (FIG. 96), when it is determined that the jackpot game based on the winning information with the sign flag 203u turned on has ended (that is, the jackpot game of the jackpot A has been executed). The sign flag 203u is also set to off in the case where the game has not shifted to the probable change game state.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 91) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main controller 110, a display controller 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotation motor 431, reversing motor 531). , A sub LED 290, a clock generator (CLK) 900, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding a display surface 523a, which is an upper display surface 523a1, which is a sub liquid crystal display device 523, in a direction parallel to the gaming machine, and is configured by a stepping motor. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is configured by a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is configured by a stepping motor that is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface are both provided. 523a2 can be independently rotated. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 independently so that the display area faces the front side and the display area faces the rear side. It is.

  The sub LED 290 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is inverted, the decorative symbol Z ( A symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is changing) is blinked to notify the player that the special symbol is changing.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms to the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. The clock generation device 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for controlling the blinking of the sub LED 290 and the decorative symbol Z at the same timing by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 is made to blink 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. By displaying the special symbol, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over-winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub-liquid crystal driving scenario 222d, and various other information necessary for controlling the game. Data, programs, and the like are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a variation pattern selection counter value (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  The over-prize table 222b is a table for selecting an over-prize effect to be executed when a game ball over-wins the specific prize port 65a of the variable prize device 65.

  Here, the details of the over winning table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the over-winning prize table 222b. The over-winning prize table 222b is a table used to select an over-winning prize effect in the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 76A, the over-winning prize table 222b includes a winning over-winning prize table 222b1 and a sign over-winning prize table. 222b2 and an over-winning prize table 222b3 are provided.

  The winning over prize table 222b1 is a table used when the winning information that is held includes winning information that will be a big hit. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the content of an effect selected as an over-winning effect is defined in the winning over-win table 222b1 in accordance with the value of the effect counter 223f, and is different depending on the number of rounds. It has become.

  Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 rounds, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “none” (that is, not executed), and “ If it is "150 to 198", it becomes "bubble", and if it is "199", it becomes "fish school".

  "Fish school" is selected as the effect content of the over-winning effect only when the winning over-winning information table 222b1 is used (that is, when the winning information which is held in the held winning information has a winning effect). By displaying an effect of “fish school” as an over-winning effect, it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player that there is winning information that will be a big hit in the held winning information.

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “none” (that is, not executed), and “100 to 189”. If so, it becomes a "bubble", and if it is "190 to 199", it becomes a "fish school". As described above, according to the progress of the round in the jackpot game, the jackpot game is configured so that the over-winning prize effect indicating that the expectation degree at which the jackpot winning information is held is high is easily displayed. Even for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the over-prize winning table 222b2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if the game is shifted to the probable changing game state in the held winning information, and the probable changing game state is reached before the change based on the held winning information is started. This is a table used when there is a possibility of shifting to (ie, when it is not determined that a big hit will occur afterwards, but there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “Nothing”. (I.e., not executed), and if "150-199", it is a "bubble".

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “none” (that is, not executed), and “100 to 199”. If so, it becomes a "bubble".

  The over-winning prize table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that is a big hit in the held prize information.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 179”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “None”. (I.e., not executed), and if "180-199", it is a "bubble".

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 159”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “none” (that is, not executed), and “160 to 199”. If so, it becomes a "bubble".

  In this manner, the over-winning winning table 222b3 is configured such that “bubble” is less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect than the over-winning winning table 222b2. Thereby, when "bubble" is displayed as the over-winning effect, the player can be expected to win afterwards, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present control example, any one of three types of “none”, “bubble”, and “fish school” is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from four types, or may be selected from two types. In addition, the effect content may be configured so that “absence” (that is, not executed) is not selected, and the over-winning effect may be displayed each time an over-win is achieved. Thereby, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over prize has been won.

  Further, as the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the number of over-winning game balls.

  Further, the effect may be varied according to the number of over-winning game balls. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Next, the details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select an ending effect at the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the ending table 222c has a winning ending table 222c1, a sign ending table 222c2, and a sign ending table 222c2. , A ending table 222c3.

  The winning ending table 222c1 is a table used when the winning information that is held includes winning information that will become a big hit. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the winning ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 19”, the effect content of the ending effect is selected as “none” (that is, not executed), In the case of "20 to 59", "bubble" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special bubble" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

  In the sign ending table 222c2, there is prize information that will be a big hit if the game is shifted to the probable change game state in the held prize information, and the probable change game state is reached before the change based on the stored prize information is started. This is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect are defined in the sign ending table 222c2, and "bubble" is used as the over-winning effect during the jackpot game. Is different depending on the number of times (the value of the bubble number counter 223j) is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the bubble counter 223j is “0 to 4” and the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the ending effect is “absent” (that is, not executed). ) Is selected. If “150-179”, “bubble” is selected, and if “180-199”, “special bubble” is selected.

  If the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99" when the value of the bubble number counter 223j is "5 to 15", the effect content of the ending effect is selected as "none" (that is, not executed). If "100 to 159", "bubble" is selected, and if "160 to 199", "special bubble" is selected.

  If the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 49” when the value of the bubble number counter 223j is “16 or more”, “none” (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and “ If it is "50-99", "bubble" is selected, and if it is "100-199", "special bubble" is selected.

  As described above, when the effect of “bubble” is displayed as a large number of over-winning effects, the ending effect of “bubble” or “special bubble” indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit thereafter is easily selected. It is configured as follows. As a result, although a large number of “bubbles” are selected (displayed) in the over-winning prize production, a production with a low degree of expectation (for example, “none”) is selected in the ending production, and the game of the player is played. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in motivation.

  In the case where the ending effect is selected using the sign ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur thereafter. Therefore, if many effects of "bubbles" are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit after that, that is, the reliability of the displayed effect is high. Will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, a privilege that the reliability of the ending effect is improved can be given, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The out-of-game ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information that becomes a jackpot when shifting to the probable change gaming state in the held winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect are defined in the off-ending table 222c2.

  Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 159”, the effect content of the ending effect is “none” (that is, not executed), and if “160 to 189”, the effect is “bubble”. Is selected, and if "190 to 199", "special bubble" is selected.

  In the present control example, the regulation of the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content is changed only in the sign ending table 222c2 according to the value of the bubble number counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same may be naturally applied to the hit ending table 222c1 and the off-ending table 222c3.

  Next, a sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-liquid crystal driving scenario 222d is for driving various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and reversing motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523. Information is stored.

  Specifically, a slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving a slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are rotationally moved in the circumferential direction. A rotation drive scenario 222d2 for driving the rotation motor 311 to be driven and an inversion drive scenario 222d3 for driving the inversion motor 531 for inverting the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 respectively are provided.

  First, the content of the slide driving scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. The slide drive scenario 222d1 includes set values (operation speed (pps), operation speed (pps), and the like set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. The number of operation steps and the operation direction) are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), an operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the close position in accordance with the value “1” of the driving scenario counter 223m (outbound path) Operation) is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. The set contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the separation position to the close position.

  Here, at the operation speed of 50 pps, 50 pulses (steps) are output to the motor driver per second, so that the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate 100 steps (moving from the separated position to the close position). The time required to perform the operation is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

  Corresponding to the value “5001” of the driving scenario counter 223m, information relating to an operation (return operation) for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the proximity position to the separation position is stored. I have. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. The set contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

  Here, the driving scenario counter 223m is a counter that increments by 1 every 1 ms. Therefore, the value of the driving scenario counter 223m becomes “5001” only when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are located close to each other. This is 5 seconds after the start of the slide displacement to the separated position (that is, 3 seconds after the completion of the slide displacement for 2 seconds).

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “7001” of the driving scenario counter 223m. The value of the driving scenario counter 223m becomes “7001” two seconds after the operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is started (ie, This is when the sliding displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the proximity position to the separation position is completed. By reading the “END” data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  As described above, in the slide driving scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and are maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds, and then again at 2 seconds. It slides from the near position to the separated position in seconds.

  Next, the contents of the rotational drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, a set value (operating speed (pps) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is also applied to the rotational drive scenario 222d2. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 move the first rotation position (upper display) in accordance with the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are left and right at positions rotated from the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 by 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position. Position), information relating to an operation for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position (operation of the outward path) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction.

  In response to the value “8001” of the driving scenario counter 223m, the third symbol display device 81, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the operation for rotating in the circumferential direction from the second rotation position to the first rotation position (return operation) ) Is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “12001” of the driving scenario counter 223m.

  As described above, in the rotation driving scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position in three seconds, and then rotate in the second rotation position for five seconds. , And again from the second rotation position to the first position in 3 seconds.

  Next, the contents of the inversion driving scenario 222d3 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, the set value (operating speed (pps) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is also applied to the inversion driving scenario 222d3. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side, corresponding to the value “1” of the driving scenario counter 223m). ) Is stored. Information related to an operation (an outward movement) for inverting from a reverse position to a reverse position (a position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Corresponding to the value "5001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, information relating to an operation (return path operation) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to invert from the inversion position to the normal position again is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “8001” of the driving scenario counter 223m.

  As described above, in the inversion driving scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the normal position to the inversion position over 2 seconds, is maintained at the inversion position for 3 seconds, and then is again moved from the inversion position over 2 seconds. Flip to position.

  In this control example, in each driving scenario, the operation for one motor is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving scenario for driving the reversing motor 531 after driving the sliding motor 431 may be defined. Thus, the reversing operation can be performed after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close position. As a result, variations for driving (displacing) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increase, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, and a stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub winning number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble number counter 223j, clock counter 223k, driving scenario counter 223m, driving scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, Is provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main When the number of balls has been subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Detailed description is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in a range of 0 to 198 used for a notice effect and various lotteries. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times the round in the jackpot game has been executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when selecting an over winning effect in the over winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over-winning effect in accordance with the value of the round number counter 223g, the over-winning effect can be selected (displayed) at a different ratio for each round.

  The sub winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the round of the jackpot game. The sub winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control device 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and according to the value of the sub winning number counter 223h, it is a normal winning or an over winning. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). Then, although not shown, when a new round number command is received, it is initialized to zero.

  The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether an effect of “fish school” has been selected (displayed) in the over-winning prize production. The fish school flag 223i is turned on (see S2109 in FIG. 104) when an over-winning effect of “fish school” is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104), and is turned off in the ending setting process (see FIG. 104). See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes in FIG. 105), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the effect indicating that the certainty-variable game state is given is repeatedly performed (displayed), thereby giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Further, it is possible to prevent a so-called falling-down effect in which the effect of “bubbles” is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of “fish school” is displayed as the over-winning effect.

  The bubble number counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times the effect of “bubble” is selected as the over-winning effect. In the over-winning process (see FIG. 104), the number-of-bubbles counter 223j is incremented by 1 when an over-winning effect of “bubbles” is selected (see S2111 in FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble number counter 223j is used when selecting an ending effect in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

  The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114 by performing the effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k.

  Specifically, when it is determined in the ramp editing process (see FIG. 107) that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k becomes 1000, lighting of the sub LED 290 and display of the sub symbol are started, and when it becomes 1002, the sub LED 290 is turned off and the sub symbol is not displayed. It is determined.

  Note that the clock of the clock generator 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by one every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as turning on an LED after two seconds, the effect may be determined to start from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to a clock that changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz). For example, it may be changed in a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 10 Hz), or may be changed in a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generation device 900 increases (that is, the change interval becomes shorter), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may be configured to be shorter. Thus, even when the clock frequency of the clock generation device 900 increases, the clock counter 223k can be updated without missing any change.

  The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing at which various drive motors are controlled. The driving scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the fluctuation pattern in which the driving scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes). Then, in the sub liquid crystal driving process (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, when a driving scenario is set in a driving scenario storage area 223n described later, one is added. According to the value of the driving scenario counter 223m, information for driving the motor set in the driving scenario storage area 223n is obtained, and various driving motors (sliding motor 431, rotating motor 311 and reversing motor 531) are obtained. ) Is drive-controlled.

  The driving scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. In the driving scenario storage area 223m, when the fluctuation pattern in which the driving scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario 222d is stored. You. Various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and inversion motor 531) are drive-controlled based on the drive scenario information stored in this drive scenario storage area 223m.

  The other memory area 223z further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol ( (Fluctuation effect) and a notice effect.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol ( (Fluctuation effect) and a notice effect.

  FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113 and the clock generator 900. The output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237. 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 and a sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, the initialization processing (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 83) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 while the power-on main image is being displayed, the game is started by the player, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is displayed. Is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 is displayed by a fluctuation effect when a ball is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, the back B corresponding to the “sky stage”, and the back C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all the third symbol display devices. The image is an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed at 81, and is displayed by the image controller 237 such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numerals “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the fluctuation is started on the third symbol display device 81 even though the fluctuation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to a display related to a command, a round effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time-saving period of this ordinary symbol is, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the ordinary entrance 67, the more chances are for the ordinary symbol to be drawn, and the greater the chance of hitting the ordinary symbol. . Therefore, the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a jackpot of a normal symbol increases, so that the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640, and a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, so that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the ball is turned into the second winning opening. When the player easily enters 640, the number of award balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the held special symbol lottery results in a special symbol jackpot, the player can make a special symbol lottery in the held special symbol lottery. Can be recognized, so that the player can surely have the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the game information related command, one display related to the jackpot related command, and one display data table corresponding to the round effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 82). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 82 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process are performed so that the image at power-on 8 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111B) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 83) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 111 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 83), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the one-frame image, the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, it is performed (see S5002 of FIG. 126).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the sound ramp control device 113, and the effect is easily synchronized with the sound ramp control device 113 by performing the effect based on the value of the display clock counter 223m. Can be done.

  Specifically, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generation device 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by one every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as turning on an LED after two seconds, the effect may be determined to start from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  Although details will be described later, the clock output of the clock generation device 900 is started after the start-up process of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 in FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, after the start-up process of the display control device 114 which requires more time for processing than the sound lamp control device 113 is completed (that is, the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is completed) Since the output of the clock is started, the values of the clock counters (the clock counter 223k and the display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

  The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and a reversal amount storage area 233p3.

  The drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and reversing motor 531) is set in the sound lamp control device 113. Drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

  Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates, display angle, and the like of each image constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Thus, a suitable effect can be displayed even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid or rotated.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it indicates that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the demonstration is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and the demo display data table other than the demo display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (determined) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this control example, When they reach 299, 99 and 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display and the third symbol performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

  In this control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when a small hit is made, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result). Is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a special winning opening opening scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S217). A jackpot setting is executed (S218).

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (determination of success or failure), and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  If the probability change flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The result of the lottery is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73C). As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a big hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random numbers may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are a large jackpot. May be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to have the expectation of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low-probability game state), and thus the first pachinko machine acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value of the special symbol jackpot, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is set. Is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big hit indicating the big hit A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A). The big hit type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out of the way (S305: No), a display mode for the special symbol corresponding to the out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined departure. Next, the variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this processing ends.

  Although not shown, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined fluctuation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the start winning is determined. When there is, a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than four. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so that the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), after the processing of S412, the pre-read processing is executed (S413). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the prefetching process (S413), which is one of the start winning processes (see S105 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). If the result of the determination is that there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

  In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is a probability change (S502). If the game state is a probability change (S502: Yes), the first per-random number table 202a has a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the processing of S502, if the gaming state is not certain (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value at the low probability in the first random number table 202a (S504), and the processing of S505 is performed. Move on.

  In the processing of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the processing of S503 or S504 is a jackpot (S505). In the process of S505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S505: Yes), a winning information command indicating a big hit and including a big hit type is set (S506), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S505 that the lottery result is out of order (S505: No), then, if the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probable changing gaming state, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit. It is determined (S507).

  In the processing of S507, even if the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the surely changing gaming state, if the lottery result is out (S507: No), a winning information command indicating the outlier is set (S508). The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S507, if the gaming state at the start of the change is the probable change game state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then, the process shifts to the probable change state at the start of the change It is determined whether or not there is a possibility (S508). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the changing winning information or the held winning information includes the winning information which becomes a jackpot which shifts to the certainty changing state.

  In the processing of S508, when there is no possibility that the game has shifted to the probable change state at the start of the fluctuation (that is, there is no jackpot winning information for changing to the probable change game state) (S508: No), the winning indicating the departure is made. The information command is set (S509), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when there is a possibility that the game has shifted to the probable change state at the start of the fluctuation (that is, there is a jackpot winning information that shifts to the probable change game state) (S508: Yes), the high probability The lottery result is obtained based on the jackpot determination values for the game and the low probability (S520). Then, the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S511), indicating that the sign flag 203u is ON, and setting a winning information command including the respective lottery results acquired in the processing of S520 (S512). To end.

  Here, in the present control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probable change game state is given until the game ball passes the probable change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the present control example, by executing the processing of S507 to S512, if there is winning information that is a jackpot that can pass through the probability change switch 65a5, the respective lottery results at the time of high probability and at the time of low probability are determined. It can be obtained and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect regardless of whether or not the probable change game state is provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and displays the change of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the power combination attached to the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed. In the middle. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is retained on the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608).

  If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number per symbol table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the probability random second hit random number table 202c, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not a normal symbol has been won (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S614: Yes), the special symbol is now being hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not during the special symbol jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the processing of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: No), the processing shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device (lighted display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106) is changed to the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f does not. If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol is used. The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present control example) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 93), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 84). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 85) and the start winning process (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric auditors product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. It starts in the devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variable display executed in 37B is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86). , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. I do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89). ).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 91 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening port) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1103, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1103: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1103 that the special symbol is being hit (S1103: Yes), the processing of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the big hit operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this processing ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the open / close door 65f1 are set for each round.

  Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and the process ends.

  As described above, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game may be terminated halfway. Defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the operation timing of the positive variable solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probable variable solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probable variable solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present control example), which is a ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined. If it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1108: Yes), the probable variable solenoid 65k is turned off (S1109) and the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this processing ends. Although not shown, in the present control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is turned off. However, in consideration of the case where the big hit game ends without the game ball passing through the certainty changing switch 65a5, the certainty changing solenoid 65k is set to OFF in the process of S1009, just in case.

  Here, the ending process (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 96). In the ending processing (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is ON (S1302). In the processing of S1302, when it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probable change flag 203g is set on (S1303), and this processing ends. Although not shown, the probable variable setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probable variable flag 203g being set to on.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1302 that the probable change setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probable change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether a game ball has passed through the certainty change switch 65a5 and set the certainty change. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed to the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. Play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification processing (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification processing (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is a value larger than 0 (S1401). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made based on the detection of winning of 10 balls or the determination that 30 seconds have elapsed in the twelfth round. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402: No), the process ends. Here, the counter of 2 seconds is set in S1403, so that the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball elapsing time after the completion of 12 rounds, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, and the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the big hit game, expecting the certain change game state to be given.

  In the present control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the thirteenth round from one second before the end of the interval time is performed, but is not limited thereto. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by subtracting -1 (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after the update is 0 (S1405). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), a notification command is set (S1406). After that, this processing ends. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the output of the sound “look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1501). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). When it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S1501: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. If it is determined that the game has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 to the winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j. It is set (S1503). After that, the processing of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

  In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1506). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). After that, the processing of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it is possible to determine that the ball has been thrown since the door 65f1 was closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1504, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the processing of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the processing of S1508 is executed.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1508). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting -1 (S1509). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the certainty changing switch 65a5 (S1510). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the certainty variable passage switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the certainty variable passage counter 203i and updated (S1511). The probable change setting flag 203h is set on (S1512). After that, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1510 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the processing of S1513 is executed. In the processing of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1514). The probable change valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1515). After that, this processing ends. Here, by setting the probable change valid flag 203q to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probable change switch 65a5 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probable change game is performed. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability change valid flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probable change valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change enable flag 203q is ON (S1516: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the probability change enable timer 203r (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present control example) (S1518). If it is determined that the probable change valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1518: Yes), the probable change valid flag 203q is set to off (S1519). The probable change valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1518 that the probability change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the processing of S1510 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203r is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65a5, so that the probability change game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the possibility that the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65a5 and the probability change game state is given.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this processing ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing (S1113). In the abnormal process (S1113), a process is executed to monitor whether the probable variable switch 65a5 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1601). If it is out of the round validity period (S1601: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether a game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is added and updated (S1603). After that, the processing of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed.

  In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1604: Yes), the ball is being thrown out, and the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1605). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1606: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the probability variable passing counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) and the number of winning pieces (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. It is determined (S1607).

  If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). After that, the processing of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game balls in the variable winning device 65 and to suppress the illegality of passing the game balls to the certainty change switch 65a5 even in the case of the big hit B.

  In the processing of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1610). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the certainty passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1611), and thereafter, this processing ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 100, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1815 (see FIG. 101). ) Is determined (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1815. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1815 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1702: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1815 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process moves to S1708.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1704. On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure and after the execution of the power-off process in S1817 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the flow shifts to S1708.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1817, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1706). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1817 (see S1816 in FIG. 101). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1817 is executed, the process of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1817 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1709), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1704 to S1706 is executed. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process skips S1709, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1710, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1711), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1709 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1704 to S1708 via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1811. In the processing of S1801, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined in S1802 to S1811 in relation to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1813, and the command determination process in S1812 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later (S1803), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and responds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. In addition, monitoring of an input as to whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81 is also performed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, a lighting pattern of the illumination units 29 to 33, a lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Details of the ramp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing in S1810 is completed, a sub-liquid crystal driving process is performed to drive (slide driving, rotational driving, etc.) the sub-liquid crystal display device (sub-liquid crystal) 523 (S1811). Details of the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1813. In the process of S1813, a variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting processing is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1816), and the power-off processing is executed (S1817). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S1818), and then the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1815: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1812). This command determination processing (S1812) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this processing, when a pending ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 102, S1812), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 of the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In the processing of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the end of the process in S1908, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main controller 110 when it is touched, every time a winning start is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1908. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is detected when detecting a winning start or a special symbol lottery. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1907, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether or not a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), a notification voice (“look at the liquid crystal” in this control example) corresponding to the received command is selected, and a display command for notification is set. (S1910).

  Next, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1911). If it is determined in the process of S1911 that a jackpot-related command has been received (S1911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1912), and the process shifts to S1913. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1911 that the jackpot-related command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1913.

  In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, a process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. The command is set so as to be transmitted to.

  Next, the jackpot-related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S1912). The jackpot-related process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

  In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), a display opening command is set (S2002), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the processing of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub winning number counter 223h updated in the processing of S2007 is larger than 10 (S2008). In the processing of S2008, if the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), a number of gaming balls greater than the predetermined winning number (10) in one round have entered the specific winning opening 65a ( This is the case in which a so-called over prize is won). In this case, an over-winning process is executed (S2009), and this process ends. The details of the over-winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), a normal effect command is set to execute a normal winning effect, and the normal effect command is set. The process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2011).

  In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting processing is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing ends. I do. The ending setting process (S2012) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2011 that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether or not a V-pass command has been received (S2014).

  In the processing of S2014, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2016: Yes), in order to execute an effect indicating that the game ball passes through the certainty change switch 65a5 and the certainty change game state is given, A display V effect command is set (S2015), and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the over-winning process (S2009). This over-winning processing (S2009) is executed in the above-described jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 103), and is a processing for executing an effect based on the over-winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the over-winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). If it is determined that there is winning winning information (S2103: Yes), an over winning effect is selected from the winning over winning table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S2101 (S2103). , To S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information to be won in the process of S2103 (S2103: No), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information including information for which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is winning information including information for which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the sign-over flag is determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f from the sign-over winning table 222b2. A winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process moves to S2107.

  In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information that the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), the over-winning based on the value of the effect counter 223f from the off-over winning table 222b3. A winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process moves to S2107.

  In the processing of S2107, an over-winning command for display indicating an over-winning effect selected in the processing of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2108.

  In the processing of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over-prize-winning effect is “fish school” (S2108). When it is determined that the selected over-prize-winning effect is “Fish School” (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that the selected over-winning effect is not “Fish School” (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is “bubble”. (S2110). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is “bubble” (S2110), the number-of-bubbles counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and the process ends. In the process of S2111, the number of times “bubble” is selected in the over-winning is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times “bubble” is selected (FIG. 104).

  In the process of S2110, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not “bubble” (S2110: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, the over-prize effect displayed at the time of the over-prize differs depending on whether or not there is information on which the jackpot is stored in the win information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not the jackpot is thereafter determined). It is configured as follows. This allows the player to execute the game with the expectation that the over-winning prize effect will be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Next, an ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S2012). The ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-described jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect at the end of the jackpot.

  In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). In the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is ON (S2201: Yes), then, in the over-winning effect, an effect indicating that the probable change game state is given is already executed (displayed). Therefore, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the flow shifts to the process of S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the effect indicating that the certainty-variable game state is given is repeatedly performed (displayed), thereby giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be won is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), the ending effect is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (S2205), and proceeds to the process of S2209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2204 that the winning information to be won is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: No), then the winning information including the information for which the sign flag 203u is set to ON It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is winning information including information for which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the sign ending table 222c2, and the process proceeds to S2209. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information for which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), the effect is selected from the off ending table 222c3, and the process of S2209 is performed. Move to.

  In the processing of S2209, an effect command indicating the effect selected in the processing of S2202, S2205, S2207 or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set to off (S2210), and the value of the bubble number counter 223j is set. It is set to 0 (S2211), and this processing ends.

  In this way, the ending effect displayed at the end of the big hit differs depending on whether there is information that makes a big hit in the prize information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not there is a big hit thereafter). It is configured as follows. This allows the player to execute the game while paying attention to the ending effect, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1813). The variable display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2301: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then the change pattern is set in the command determination process (see FIG. 102) in S1903. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2303).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  When the processing in S2304 is completed, it is determined whether or not a driving scenario is set in the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing in S2303 (S2305). If it is determined in the process of S2305 that there is a driving scenario setting (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub-liquid crystal driving scenario 222d to the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306). The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

  In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2308). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2308: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then, in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process proceeds to S2312. In the process of S2312, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2312). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the ramp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the ramp editing process (S1808). This ramp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and has the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114. The setting such as lighting of the sub-LED controlled to be turned on is executed.

  In the ramp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the process skips steps S2402 to S2406 and shifts to the step S2407.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). .

  In the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S2403: No), the process of S2404 to S2406 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2407.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be turned on is determined based on the selected fluctuation time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. I do.

  In the process of S2407, a process for turning on the other lamps is performed, and the process ends.

  As will be described in detail later, the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute the lighting of the sub LED and the display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I am trying to do it. Thereby, it is possible to control to turn on the sub LED at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811). The sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide driving, (For example, rotational driving).

  In the sub-liquid crystal driving process (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether a driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2501). In the process of S2501, if it is determined that the driving scenario is not stored, the timing is not the time to drive the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and thus the process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2501 that the driving scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the driving scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m after the addition in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and inversion motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. In order to perform this, motor drive data is set based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), a drive data command is set (S2505), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that there is no motor drive data (S2503), then it is determined whether or not it is the drive scenario end timing (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the drive scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is “END”, it is determined that the drive scenario has ended.

  In the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is the drive scenario end timing (S2506: Yes), the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is not the end timing of the driving scenario, the present process is terminated as it is.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2702, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2702, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2703). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S2601) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2702. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the leading part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2701. After the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2702, the processing of S2703 to S2705 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present control example, the case has been described where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2603, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2604, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 123A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is performed (see S4602 in FIG. 123A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are rendered in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and simple display setting processing (see S2909 in FIG. 111B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first winning port 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a fluctuation pattern command for display is received, a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) is displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect is performed. Can be. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the start of clock output is set to the clock generator 900 (S2607). As a result, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 starts up. Since the sound lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the clock output is started after both the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 start up. Can be accurately synchronized.

  Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2606, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 111B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2902), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interruption process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2903), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2904). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2903) or the simple display setting processing (S2909). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

  Next, a drawing correction process is performed to correct the drawing contents (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2907). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2904), the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2905) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete release, chance The stop type table corresponding to eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed (S2909). If it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S2912) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2902), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S3003).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), and returns to the process of S3001.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 113A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present control example, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3103, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to off (S3106), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S3102. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006). If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3007), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out, and chance) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S3201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B) is executed, and the third symbol display device is determined. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is set (S3202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3203), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3202. In the above-described task processing (S2904), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3203, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present control example, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low readout speed, but before the drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S3202.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present control example, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the departure completely. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among unprocessed commands (S3008). If there is a related command, a display jackpot related command process is executed (S3009), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, referring to FIG. 114 to FIG. 117, the above described display jackpot-related command processing (S3009), which is one of the command determination processing (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, is described. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing.

  In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301). S3301: Yes), execute an opening command process (S3302), and shift to the process of S3303.

  Here, the opening command processing (S3302) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S3405), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303). If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process moves to S3305.

  Here, the round number command processing (S3304) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S3505), the round number command processing ends, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the process of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S3305). If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

  Here, the ending command processing (S3306) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3603). S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3305 that there is no ending command for display (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a normal prize production command for display among unprocessed commands (S3307). If there is a normal winning effect command for display (S3307: Yes), a normal winning effect command process is executed (S3308), and the process shifts to S3309.

  Here, the details of the normal winning effect command processing (S3308) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing the normal winning effect command processing. This normal prize effect command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display normal prize effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the normal prize effect command processing, first, a normal prize display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal prize effect indicated by the display normal prize effect command is determined, and the determined normal prize display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. And set it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

  Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S3705), the normal winning command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S3307, when it is determined that there is no normal prize production command for display (S3307: No), it is then determined whether there is an over prize production command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3309). If there is a display over-winning effect command (S3309: Yes), normal over-effect command processing is executed (S3310), and the routine goes to the processing of S3311.

  Here, the details of the over-winning-prize effect command processing (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117 (a) is a flowchart showing the over-winning-winning-effect command processing. The over-winning-effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display over-winning-effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the over winning effect command processing, first, an over winning effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over winning effect indicated by the display over winning effect command is determined, and the determined over winning effect display data table is stored in a data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

  Next, based on the over-winning-prize effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the over-winning-prize effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S3309, when it is determined that there is no over-winning prize production command for display (S3309: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V production command among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command processing is executed (S3312), and the display big hit related command processing ends.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing. The V effect command process executes a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the V effect command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3311, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display big hit-related command process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the process of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a back image change command (S3010). If there is (S3010: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4001). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4002), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S4002. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4002 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3010, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3010: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3010). If it is (S3010: Yes), an error command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4101, the type of the error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S4102, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S3012, when it is determined that there is no error command (S3012: No), it is next determined whether or not there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

  In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is a counter command (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to S3001. The counter command notifies the display control device 114 of the timing of turning on the sub LED 290 in the audio lamp control device 113. The lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the notified timing of turning on the sub LED 290. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub symbol is set in a sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. Thus, the control is performed such that the sub-design is displayed at the same timing as the timing at which the sub LED 290 is turned on in the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display clock counter 223m, which is a counter synchronized with the audio lamp control device 113. Since it is possible, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol can be produced in synchronization.

  In the process of S3014, when it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), it is next determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and when there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), reception is performed. The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the received command (S3017), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3001.

  By the process of S3017, the display content (for example, the display angle or the like) can be changed according to the updated information on driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect can be executed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3016 that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3018), and the processing returns to S3001.

  In the processing of S3001 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S3001 to S3013 and S3019 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, The command determination processing ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2911) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary to display an image at power-on (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, is selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 113 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 113 (b)) corresponding to each command are executed. With respect to this command, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3101, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting processing (S2903), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S4202), and then S4203 to S4204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4203: No), then the process proceeds to S4205.

  In S4205, a pointer update process is performed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the display contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, a sub-symbol setting process is executed to set the display of the sub-symbol (S4207). Here, the details of the sub-symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This sub-symbol setting process is a process for displaying a sub-symbol on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub-LED 290 whose lighting is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the sub-symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is a fluctuation period (S4501). In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the period is not the fluctuation period (S4501: No), this timing is not the timing of displaying the sub symbol displayed in response to the fluctuation, and thus this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is the fluctuation period (S4501), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, among the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n, it is determined whether or not information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is lighting information.

  In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the rendering content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) is determined. The sub-symbol information is set (changed) to lighting, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the rendering content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Among them, the information of the sub-symbol is set (changed) to be turned off, and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the process of S4207 is completed, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is determined whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S4210).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. Therefore, first, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S4311), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4212). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after the final display flag 233z indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4215), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S4216, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4210, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off instead of on (S4210: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the display data table for demonstration is displayed on the display data table. The contents are set in the table buffer 233d (S4218), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4219). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4222), and this processing ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt processing. .

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the processing of S4217, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2912) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at power-on ends, the fluctuation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (FIG. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 123A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S4701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S4701: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4702). In the process of S4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4702 (S4702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4702: Yes), the process moves to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process shifts to the process of S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S4703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting processing (see S2909 in FIG. 111B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the normal drawing of the image is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, a pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S4205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2903). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4805.

  Also, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4806 (S4806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4806: Yes), the process moves to S4807. Also, as a result of the processing in S4805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S4805: No), the processing shifts to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S4812), and the process moves to S4813.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4813, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S4813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the above-described drawing correction processing (S2906), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction processing. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting an effect to be displayed according to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  In the drawing correction processing, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being driven (S4901). In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), the process is terminated as it is not necessary to correct the drawing content.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being driven (S4901: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S4902 to perform correction according to the driving state.

  In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being slid (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of sliding movement. (S4903), and proceeds to the processing of S4904. In the process of S4903, the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected, so that the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed corresponding to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display). Can improve the interest of the player.

  In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the slide drive is not performed (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4904.

  In the processing of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and the display angle) of all images are determined according to the amount of rotationally driven rotation. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this process ends.

  Since the display coordinates (and the display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the rotation amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the processing of S4905, a suitable effect is displayed even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-described drawing process (S2907), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2905) (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the head address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 111B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the first control example, the over-prize effect is displayed when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that an over-prize has been won during the jackpot game, so that a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  As the over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the number of over-winning game balls. Further, the effect may be varied according to the number of over-winning game balls. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  In the first control example, as the over-winning effect, the over-winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed according to the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the selection ratio of the over prize winning effect is configured to be different. Thereby, even if the jackpot game is performed for a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, a character string indicating right-handing (right-handed, right-handed, right-handed) is configured to be displayed circumferentially. Thereby, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the player is in a gaming state in which right-handing is performed.

  Note that a display suggesting right-handing may be performed, and a sound suggesting right-handing (for example, a voice saying “Please right-hand”) may be output. Thereby, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to appropriately suggest (notify) that the player is in a gaming state in which the player makes a right-handed game.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured.

  As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 performs an inversion operation and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, it is possible to grasp the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol by visually checking the sub LED. Can provide a game machine that is easy for players to understand.

  In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is changed according to the displacement. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect, and to improve the interest of the player. Further, even if a part or the whole of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to preferably display the effect.

  In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slid) up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), and when they are driven left and right (slide). ) (Ie, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect, and to improve the interest of the player.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the above-described first control example, a description has been given of a gaming machine that displays an effect when a gaming ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the game balls over-winning during the jackpot game are stored in an area that can be visually recognized by the player, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is stored in accordance with the number of the stored game balls. It was configured to change the effect contents. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  In the above-described first control example, a character string indicating right-handed (right-handed, right-handed, right-handed) is arranged and displayed in a circumferential shape, so that the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed. The gaming machine has been described which can suitably suggest that the player is in a right-handed gaming state even when the player rotates 81).

  On the other hand, in the present control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j for indicating the game state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are circumferentially arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the circumference is arranged. The game state is indicated by the lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged in a circle. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse, the game state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295a provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to rotate, it is possible to suggest (notify) a game state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

  The second control example is different from the first control example in that the variable winning device 65 is changed so that the over-winning game balls are stored in an area visible to the player. A distributing member 65c for distributing whether or not the winning game balls are stored and a distributing motor 65c2 for driving the distributing member are provided, and a game state is provided on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The difference is that the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j for indicating (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are arranged circumferentially. Further, the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control process 113 are partially changed. They differ in that they do. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 127 is a view showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, this control example is different from the first control example in that the inside of the variable winning device 65 is changed, and the other points are the same.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, the variable winning device 65 in the present control example performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (for example, when the jackpot game is started, similar to the first control example). , 15 times (rounds). In each round, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until a predetermined number (10) of balls are won).

  In each round, up to a predetermined number of winning game balls are discharged through the normal winning channel 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, game balls that have won more than a predetermined number (so-called over-winning game balls) are configured to flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

  On the left side of the opening / closing door 65f1, an effect portion for executing an effect with a game ball after winning the variable prize device 65 is formed. The effect part will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 128. In each round game, more than ten game balls (hereinafter, referred to as over-win) win the distribution member 65c (see FIG. 128). And an effect of whether or not to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 is executed. In the present control example, in each round, when four or more balls are stored in the storage channel 65e4, the stored balls to be hit are stored in the stored balls. As shown in FIG. 127, since the distribution member 65c and the storage channel 65e4 are arranged at positions visible to the player, a prize ball is paid out more than usual by winning over during a jackpot game. In addition to the feeling of expectation, it is possible to enjoy the effect of whether or not the over-winning game ball is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described. FIG. 128A is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening formed at a height at which one game ball can pass, and the game ball entering the opening is directed to the back side of the game board 13. Is formed. Inside the specific winning opening 65a, a guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for causing the game ball to flow downstream is formed, and the guide hole and an over winning channel 65e3 described later or a normal winning. The flow path 65e1 is formed in communication with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected.

  A winning channel switching member 65b is disposed between the normal winning channel 65e1 and the over winning channel 65e3, so that the game ball can be distributed to the normal winning channel 65e1 and the over winning channel 65e3. Have been. The winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward by an over-winning solenoid (not shown) and the tip is directed horizontally (see FIG. 128 (b)), and is rotated downward and the tip is directed downward. The state (see FIG. 128A) is rotatable. When the over-winning prize solenoid is turned on, the prize-winning flow path switching member 65b rotates upward (see FIG. 128 (b)), and when the over-winning prize solenoid is turned off, the prize-winning flow path switching member 65b moves downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128A).

  The normal prize flow path 65e1 is a flow path for causing a game ball to flow vertically downward in a state where the prize flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128A), and is for discharging the game ball. The discharge passage 65e2 is configured to communicate with the discharge passage 65e2. A discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a flowing game ball is disposed in the discharge flow path 65e2. The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path through which game balls flow until 10 balls are won in each round, and the flown game balls pass through the discharge flow path 65e2 and the flow path in which the positive change switch 65a5 is arranged. After being guided to the game machine, it is discharged outside the gaming machine. The game ball after being detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball similarly to the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it becomes possible to store game balls and use them for production.

  The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path that causes the game ball to flow to the left in a state where the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward and communicates with the over-winning flow path 65e3 (see FIG. 128B). It is. The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over-winning game balls that have won more than 10 balls in each round flow down. At the end of the over-winning flow path 65e3, an over-winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) for detecting the passage of the over-winning game ball is arranged. A distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls to the storage flow path 65e4 and the discharge flow path 65e2 is disposed downstream of the over-winning flow path 65e3.

  The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than one game ball. At the center of the distribution member 65c, there is formed a shaft protruding rearward, and is configured to be rotatable left and right by a stepping motor. In the sorting member 65c, a concave portion into which one game ball can enter is configured as a storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c, and is configured so that game balls flowing down from the over-winning winning flow path 65e3 can enter. The storage area 65c1 is configured such that, when a game ball enters, the entire game ball is accommodated in the storage area 65c1, so that even if the distribution member 65c rotates, the rotation does not hinder the rotation. Have been. The distributing member 65c always moves the storage area 65c1 in a direction of 45 degrees to the upper right, which is a position (see FIG. 128 (a)) where a game ball flowing down from the over-winning flow path 65e3 can be received in the leader area 65c1. The game is stopped in a state where the opening is facing, and two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over-winning detection switch 65a2, the game ball is rotated in one of the left and right directions with the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1. It is configured. The direction in which the ball is rotated is determined based on the result of determining whether or not the ball is stored stored in the ball. As will be described in detail later, if a reserved ball that makes a big hit is stored, a lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball is generated, and when a lottery is won, the lottery is executed. The dividing member 65c rotates to the left, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Note that the upper limit number is six balls, and when six balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distribution member 65c rotates rightward with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Thus, the game balls housed in the discharge channel 65e2 are caused to flow down. When the lottery with the probability of 1/2 is deviated from the above, the sorting member 65c rotates rightward, and the game balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided (distributed) to the discharge flow path 65e2. Is done.

  In the case where the reserved ball that makes a big hit is not stored in the reserved balls in the hold (when the ball that becomes a big hit is stored when passing through the probability change switch 65a5 (including before passing through the probability change switch 65a5)) , The distribution member 65c is turned left and right and distributed in the same manner as in the case where the above-mentioned retained ball that becomes a big hit is stored with a probability of 1/3. If a reserved ball that becomes a big hit when stored in the switch 65a5 is stored, up to four balls are guided to the over-winning ball in the storage area 65i. The game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 by rotating in the direction is guided to the discharge channel 65e2.

  As described above, the storage channel 65e4 has a storage area 65i formed at the end thereof, in which up to six over-winning balls can be stored. The storage area 65i is configured to have a height that allows game balls to be stacked in two stages and stored, and has a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined rightward, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging a game ball in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end. This storage switching member 65g has a shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side rotatably fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage area 65i, and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128 (b)). ) And a state in which the front end is turned vertically downward and turned downward. In this control example, at the start of the big hit game, the game is turned downward, and based on the ending start timing which is the end timing of the big hit game, it is turned upward (rotated in the upper right direction) and is stored in the storage area. The game balls in 65i are configured to be discharged to the storage and discharge channel 65e6. A storage / discharge switch 65a4 (photo sensor or the like) capable of detecting game balls discharged from the storage area 65i is disposed at an upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage / discharge channel 65e6. The game balls discharged from the storage area 65i are configured not to be guided to the positive change switch 65a5.

  Although not shown in the figure, a switching member 65h and a variable switch 65a5 that can be changed by a variable solenoid 65k are provided at a point where the discharge flow path 65e2 flows down. When the probable variable solenoid 65k is on, the dropped game ball can pass through the probable switch 65a5, and when the probable solenoid 65k is off, the released game ball cannot pass (or difficult) the probable switch 65a5. It is configured to be.

  As described above, in the variable winning device 65 according to the present control example, the winning channel switching member 65b is set so that the game ball passes through the normal winning channel 65e1 until the number of ten balls determined in each round is reached. Is controlled. Therefore, the flow path between the over-winning game ball and the game ball before over-winning can be separated, and the over-winning game ball can be accurately detected.

  In the present control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out in front of the effect portion (the distribution member 65c, the storage channel 65e4, and the storage area 65i), and is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine 10. I have.

  As described above, in the present control example, when an over prize occurs in each round, the distribution member 65c is rotated, and an effect is performed as to whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i. Therefore, it can be notified that an over-prize has been won. The player can visually recognize that a game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirm an over-winning prize, and enjoy an effect of determining in which direction the distribution member 65c rotates left or right. it can. Based on the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the jackpot game, it is also possible to predict the hit / failed determination result of the reserved ball stored in the reserve. In the present control example, when a reserved ball that is a big hit is stored in the reserved ball, the game ball is guided to the storage region 65i with a high probability, and therefore the storage region 65i is distributed by the distribution member 65c. The determination result in the reserved ball can also be predicted based on the frequency assigned to the ball. Therefore, the player can store the reserved ball that becomes a big hit in the reserved ball by distributing the game ball to the storage area 65i, and the big hit is continuously executed in a short time after the big hit game. Can have expectations for Further, in the present control example, since the maximum number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i is variably set based on the determination result stored in the hold, the hit / failure determination result can be quickly determined from the guided number. Can be predicted. Further, when five or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it is possible to recognize that a reserved ball that will be a big hit is stored in the reserved area, and to notify the player of the determination result at an early stage to interest the player. Can be improved.

  Note that, in the present control example, it is configured to notify that a reserved ball that is a big hit with five or more balls is stored, but the number or the like may be set as appropriate. In addition, the lottery probability of whether or not to allocate to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c may be appropriately set. Further, the lottery probability of the distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence rate of the over-winning prize (in the previous big hit game). Further, the maximum number based on the determination result in the reserved balls guided to the storage area 65i may be changed according to the occurrence rate of the over-winning prize (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, or the like, the third symbol display device 81 provides a character or voice guidance such as “If three game balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the hold is determined!”. Thus, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to distribute the game balls in a seesaw shape. In addition, all the over-winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the number of the over-winning balls stored is used to notify the judgment result of the reserved ball, and to be used for the promotion effect during the jackpot game from a normal symbol to a positive change symbol. May be. In this case, it is conceivable to produce such an effect that a promotion chance is given by the number of over-winning balls during the jackpot game.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the second control example, the point that the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above. And the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The distribution motor 65c2 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is driven and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the driving of the distribution motor 65c2 is started, and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is alternately driven counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (two second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c has flowed down the over-winning flow path 65e3. A position rotated by 120 degrees counterclockwise around the position where the game ball can be received (a position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the storage channel 65e4) and a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise ( (A position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the out flow path 65e5) (see FIG. 128).

  The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp output device 113, and is controlled to be turned on based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The direction notification LED 295 is disposed on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and five (295f to 295j) are provided on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five (295a to 295e) are provided on the lower decorative surface 523b2. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the lighting order of the direction notification LED 295 is clockwise (clockwise), and it is suggested that right-handed is performed. (Information), when the gaming state is a left-handed gaming state, the direction LED 295 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the lighting order of the direction LED 295 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting that a left-handed is performed. (Notification).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. The other points are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The stored number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. In the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), the value of the stored number counter 203v is incremented by one when the distribution motor is set to be the distribution channel 65e4 (see FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4, it is determined whether or not the game balls are distributed to the storage area exceeding the storage upper limit number. Referenced for Although not shown, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the big hit game.

  The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls that are allocated to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the game balls that have won an over-prize. In the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 134), the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set according to the held prize information (that is, according to the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter) (see FIG. 134). S5103, S5105, and S5106). When the value of the storage number counter 203v described above is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, the distribution destination is allowed to be determined by the storage channel 65e4. Although not shown, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the big hit game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p and a stored number counter 223r are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is open, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is open, indicating that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is in the closed state, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to) enter the specific winning opening 65a. Is shown. The specific winning port state 223p is set to an open state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific winning port 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). When a close command based on the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received, the closed state is set (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning port state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether or not the command is based on an over-winning prize.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a description will be given of a liquid crystal drive-linked effect that is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example. FIGS. 131 (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the liquid crystal drive-linked effects performed in the present control example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 131 (a), a description will be given of a liquid crystal drive-linked effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, as the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the The display content displayed on the three symbol display device 81 is changed.

  Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. The star image is displayed in the section.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible at the center. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated, moved to the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left directions and displayed. The star image moved and displayed on the upper right and the upper left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that have become visible, and is moved and displayed on the lower right and the lower left. The star image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have become visible.

  When the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the star image moved to the upper right and upper left is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, The star image moved to the lower right and the lower left is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, in the liquid crystal drive-linked effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 are driven in accordance with the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. Are integrated, and an effect is displayed in which the star image is moved in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. This allows the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to be driven up and down and display an effect in accordance with the drive, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 (b), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to rotate and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. .

  The liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. The effect is executed by using the same image data and correcting the rotation angle and the position of the image data. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of image data used for the liquid crystal drive-linked effect.

  Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. The star image is displayed in the section.

  The star image displayed at the center is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Accordingly, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven to the left, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven to the right, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible at the center. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated, moved to the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left directions and displayed. The star image moved and displayed to the upper left and lower left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that have become visible, and moved to the upper right and lower right to be displayed. The star image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have become visible.

  The star image moved and displayed in the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left directions is counterclockwise (in contrast to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down). It is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise and displayed. The display positions are corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right while the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically, the display area is vertically long. The display area changes to a horizontally long display area. Therefore, the display position of each symbol is corrected so that the vertical movement amount is small and the horizontal movement amount is large. Accordingly, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  When the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and the display position of each star image are corrected, and moved to the upper left and lower left. The displayed star image is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the star image moved to the upper right and lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive-linked effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the above-described upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. In such a case, the same image data is used, the rotation angle and the display position of the image data are corrected, and the effect is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of image data used for the liquid crystal drive-linked effect.

  In the present control example, the display position of the image data is configured to be corrected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) so as to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven right and left (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be compressed (reduced) so as to be horizontally long.

  When one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display region cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display region. Alternatively, the image data may be compressed (reduced). Thereby, even when one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, it is possible to suitably display the effect.

  Next, referring to FIG. 132, a description will be given of a game method suggestion effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect of the game method suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the decoration surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is provided with a decoration imitating an apple, and the upper decoration surface 523b1 is provided with the decoration of the left half thereof. The lower right side decoration 523b2 is decorated with the remaining right half decoration. Therefore, an integrated effect can be performed by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to adjacent positions.

  Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the rounded apple portion of the decoration on the decoration surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is arranged at the uppermost position in the right half, and each direction notification LED 295 is arranged clockwise from there (in the order of the direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c... 295j), The direction notification LED 295j is arranged at the uppermost position in the left half.

  The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled to be turned on by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed command in accordance with a current game state by a game method notification process of the audio lamp control device 113 described later.

  When a right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a right-handed gaming state is set, first, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on / off, Thus, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off in the clockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LED 295 arranged in a circle is turned on / off clockwise (clockwise), so that it is suggested to the player that the game is in a right-handed gaming state. Notification).

  On the other hand, when the left-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the player is left-handed is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on / off. The direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on and off in the counterclockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LED 295 arranged circumferentially is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise), which suggests to the player that the player is in a gaming state in which the player hits left. (Notification).

  FIG. 132 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees with respect to FIG. 132 (a). In this case as well, when the right notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off clockwise (clockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a. Further, when the left notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a.

  As described above, in the present control example, regardless of the state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, by executing the same control processing, it is possible to determine that the game state is a right-hand (or left-hand) play. Can be suggested (notified). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control processing from becoming complicated.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. The jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main controller 110.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

  If it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the timing to start the jackpot (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and the process ends. I do.

  Further, by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to ON by the processing of S1131, it becomes possible to store the game balls that have entered the storage area 65i. The storage area 65i is an area where the over-winning game balls flow down, and is configured such that the content of the ending effect differs depending on the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. . The game balls stored in the storage area 65i flow down to the storage discharge channel 65e6 when the storage solenoid 65g1 is turned off at the end of the jackpot (before the ending effect starts).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot is in progress (S1103). In the process of S1103, if it is determined that the game is not a big hit (S1103: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a big hit is occurring (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

  In the processing of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over-winning solenoid 65b1 is set to off (S1132), and the big hit operation setting processing is executed (S1134). This processing ends.

  By setting the over-winning prize solenoid 65b1 to OFF by the processing of S1132, the game sphere that has entered the specific prize opening 65a and passed the detection switch 65a1 can flow into the normal prize flow path 65e1. Although details will be described later, in the same round, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls have passed through the detection switch 65a1, the over-winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON and the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1, and flows down to the over winning flow path 65e2.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the processing of S1133 that it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over-winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), the process ends.

  By setting the over-winning solenoid 65b1 to ON by the processing of S1134, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed the detection switch 65a1 is in a state in which it cannot flow down to the normal winning passage 65e1, It becomes possible to flow down to the winning channel 65e2. The game ball that has flowed down to the over-winning flow path 65e2 flows down to the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, and is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

  By the processing of S1135, the opening solenoid is turned off, so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  By the processing in S1136, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been closed. By notifying the closing command, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the subsequently entered ball number command is a ball number command based on an over-prize.

  In the process of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether or not it is the operation timing of the positive-variation solenoid 65k (S1106). In the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probable-variable solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probable-variable solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1133 that the operation timing is not the operation timing of the probable variable solenoid 65k (S1106: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the storage and discharge timing (S1137), and the storage and discharge timing is determined. If it has been performed (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is turned off (S1138), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S1137, if the timing is predetermined as the big hit game (in this control example, 5 seconds before the start timing of the ending effect), it is determined that it is the storage / discharge timing. This allows the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i to be counted by the storage / discharge switch 65a4 before the start of the ending effect, and an ending effect according to the count result can be displayed.

  The storage and discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, the discharge may be performed for each round, and the discharge may be performed at the timing when the ending command is received.

  In the process of S1137, when it is determined that it is not the storage / discharge timing (S1137: No), it is next determined whether or not the game ball has passed the storage / discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage / discharge switch 65a4 is turned on. Is determined to have passed (S1139: Yes), a storage / discharge command is set (S1140), and this processing ends.

  By the processing of S1140, the stored discharge command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can count the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game, and according to the counting result. Ending effect can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1139, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  In the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed and the process ends, as in the first control example.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), and the other processes (notification process (S1111), the winning process) (S1112), an abnormal process (S1113)) is performed, and the process ends.

  Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether the distribution motor 65c2 is to be driven so that the game balls that have passed the over-winning switch 65a2 are distributed to the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5. This is a process for setting.

  In the distribution motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

  In the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), it is not necessary to drive the distribution motor in order to distribute the game ball, so this processing is performed as it is. finish. The present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution motor may be always driven.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the held winning information includes winning information that will be a big hit. (S5102).

  In the processing of S5102, when it is determined that the winning information that has been held includes the winning information that will be a big hit (S5102: Yes), it is determined that the winning will be a big hit thereafter. Is set to 4, and the flow shifts to the step S5107.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the winning information that has been held does not include the winning information that makes a big hit (S5102: No), it is then determined whether or not the sign flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

  In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the sign flag 203u is ON (S5103), it is determined that the jackpot will not be a big hit thereafter, but the probability of the big hit is high. Is set to 3, and the flow shifts to the step S5107.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the sign flag 203u is ON (S5103: No), it is determined that all of the held winning information is out (that is, the probability of becoming a big hit thereafter is low). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2 and the flow shifts to the step S5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the game ball that has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 is to be distributed to the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5 (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

  Specifically, when the winning information that is held includes winning information that makes a big hit, the table for the big hit is used, and when the counter value is “0 to 2”, the distribution destination is set to the storage flow. The route 65e4 is determined, and in the case of “3 to 5”, the distribution destination is determined to the out channel 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to the out flow channel 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, when there is no winning information in the winning information that is held, a winning table is used. It is determined, and in the case of “2 to 5”, the distribution destination is determined to the out channel 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to the out flow channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

  In this way, if the winning information on hold has a big hit, the distribution destination is easily determined to be the storage channel 65e4, and if the winning information on hold does not have a large win, the allocation destination is determined to the out channel 65e5. It is configured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate.

  When the process of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 in the process of S5107 (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 (S5108: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the stored number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

  In the process of S5109, when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set with the distribution destination being the storage channel 65e4 ( (S5111), the stored number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and this processing ends.

  By controlling the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 by the process of S5111, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over-winning flow path 65e2. The position (orientation) is changed from the state in which it communicates with the state of communication with the storage channel 65e4. As a result, the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1 flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2, are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. Thereafter, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) where the storage region 65c1 communicates with the over-winning winning flow path 65e2.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 (S5108: No), and when it is determined that the value of the stored number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes). Sets the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 with the distribution destination set to the out flow path 65e5 (S5112), and ends this processing.

  The drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is controlled by the process of S5112, so that the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over-winning winning flow path 65e2. The position (direction) is changed from the state in which it is in a state of communicating with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls flowing down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out flow path 65e4. Thereafter, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) where the storage region 65c1 communicates with the over-winning winning flow path 65e2.

  As described above, in the distribution motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 is determined based on the winning information held (that is, according to the degree of expectation of winning afterwards). It was configured differently. Thereby, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it is possible to indicate that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 for the player is reduced. Attention can be paid, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, since the rendering section 65α is configured to be visible, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be visually recognized. Thereby, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be noticed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 are stored in the effect portion 65α is provided so as to be visible, the number of game balls allocated to the storage channel 65e4 during the jackpot game is reduced. A gaming machine that can be easily grasped and can be easily understood by a player can be provided.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) is changed to execute the game method notification process (see FIG. 138). The difference is that the jackpot-related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead, and the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 135. In the main process 2, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the processing of S1811, the game method notification processing is executed (S1831), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the details of the jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination processing (S1812) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present control example, the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has been closed during the jackpot game and the storing and discharging command indicating that the game ball has passed the storing and discharging switch 65a4 are transmitted to the main controller 110. Sent by The jackpot-related process 2 (S1912) in the present control example is different from the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103) in the first control example in that the process is performed when these commands are received. Are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), a display opening command is set (S2002), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2003).

  When it is determined in the processing of S2003 that the round number command has been received (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the display round is determined based on the value of the round number counter 223g. A number command is set (S2005). Then, the special winning port state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this processing ends.

  By the processing of S2031, the open state is set to the specific winning opening state 223p based on the reception of the round number command indicating the start of the round from the main control device 110. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the open state is set in the specific winning opening state 223p is a normal winning (that is, not an over winning).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is next determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2032). In the processing of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning processing is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2032 that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, and therefore, the normal winning command is set. This is set (S2010), and this process ends.

  In the processing of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received (S2033). When it is determined in the processing of S2033 that the close command has been received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and the present processing ends.

  As described above, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, after receiving the close command from the main control device 110 until receiving a new round number command (that is, after the specified winning port 65a finishes the specified number (10) of winnings, the next specified winning is completed. Until the opening of the mouth 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is a winning number command based on over winning.

  In the case where the closed state is set based on the lapse of a predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that an over-win has been achieved. In this case, the elapsed time from the start of the round may be measured, and it may be determined whether or not the close command has been received at the elapse of a predetermined period.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2033 that the close command has not been received (S2033: No), it is next determined whether or not the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035: Yes), the storage / discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and the process ends.

  Since the stored and discharged commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, when all the stored and discharged commands have been received, the value of the stored and discharged counter 233r becomes the stored value. This is the number of game balls stored in the area 65i. The display content of the ending effect is determined based on the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. That is, an ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be displayed. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2035 that the storage / discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), it is next determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011). In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting processing 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing is executed. finish.

  In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are performed in the same manner as the jackpot-related process of the first control example (see FIG. 103). Execute and end this processing.

  Next, the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that an ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. The points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the ending effect process 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is performed. Is selected (S2202), and the process moves to S2209.

  In the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is greater than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, if it is determined that the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is equal to or less than 4 (that is, if the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is equal to or less than 4), (S2231: No) ), The normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the flow shifts to the process of S2209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2231 that the value of the storage / discharge counter is greater than 4 (that is, if there are more than four game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game) (S2231: Yes) ), Similar to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes from S2203 to S2208 are executed, and the process proceeds to S2209.

  In the processing of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected by the processing of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, similarly to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the winning information with the big hit in the hold is selected is selected. When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, a normal ending effect is selected. Thereby, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage / discharge counter becomes 2 or more in the big hit game (that is, two or more game balls enter the storage area 65i). Can be improved.

  Although the case where the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more is not limited thereto, the value may be 3 or more, and such a limitation may not be provided.

  Furthermore, only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately indicates whether or not there is a winning prize information in a hold) is displayed. You may make it.

  Further, the table for selecting the ending effect may be changed according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r.

  Next, details of the game method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 138. The game method notification process (S1831) includes a game state in which the current game state is fired so that a game ball flows down the left side of the third symbol display device 81 (a so-called left-handed game state), and a third symbol display. This is a process for indicating (displaying) which of a game state (a so-called right-handed game state) the game state in which a game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side of the device 81.

  In the game method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the probable changing gaming state (S5201). In the process of S5201, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the probable changing gaming state (S5201: Yes), the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that a display right-handing suggestion command is set (S5202). ).

  The display right-handing suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display right-handing suggestion command, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or the sub An image indicating right-handed is displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. This can indicate to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  When the process of S5202 is completed, a right-turning suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and the process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j by the right-turning suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203. It is. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are illuminated clockwise (clockwise). It is possible to indicate (notify) that the player is in a gaming state in which a beating is performed. Thus, even while the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inversion state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b can indicate (notify) that the game state is right-handed. .

  The suggestion (notification) of the right-handed gaming state is that the LED is turned on clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since there is no such information, suggestion (notification) can be performed with the same control.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving or the probable changing gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67.

  In the processing of S5201, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the game is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 even though the gaming state is the left-handed gaming state. Since the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided (that is, a right-handed game is being played), the process of S5205 is performed to indicate (notify) that the player is in a left-handed game state. Move to.

  In the processing of S5205, a display left-handing suggestion command is set (S5205). The display left-handing suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display left-handing suggestion command. The text "Please return to left-handed!" Is displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. This can indicate to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  When the processing of S5205 is completed, a left-turning suggestion LED command is set (S5206), and this processing ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295j to a according to the left-turning suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205. It is. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are illuminated counterclockwise (counterclockwise). It can be suggested (notified) that the game state is left-handed. Thus, even while the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inversion state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b can indicate (notify) that the game state is a left-handed game state. .

  The suggestion (notification) of the game state of left-handing is that even if the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotates, the LED is lit counterclockwise (counterclockwise). Since there is no change, suggestion (notification) can be made with the same control.

  As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio for distributing the over-winning game balls to the storage channel 65e4 during the big hit is based on the held winning information (that is, the big hit thereafter). (Depending on expectations). Thereby, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it is possible to indicate that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 for the player is reduced. Attention can be paid, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, the rendering section 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls during the jackpot is arranged to be visible. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, and can pay attention to the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, in the effect portion 65α, the storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided so as to be visible. Thereby, the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 during the jackpot game can be easily grasped, and a gaming machine easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In the second control example, a game ball that has been over-prized during a jackpot game is stored in an area visible to the player, and the jackpot is determined according to the number of the stored game balls (the value of the storage discharge counter 223r). The ending effect of the game is configured to be variable. This allows the player to pay attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately indicates whether or not there is a winning prize information in a hold) is displayed. You may make it.

  In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j for indicating the game state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are circumferentially arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and are circumferentially arranged. The game state is indicated by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the provided direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse, the game state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295a provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to rotate, it is possible to suggest (notify) a game state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged circumferentially.

<About the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

  In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 which are the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are used. The gaming machine that performs the production has been described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display surface 523a1. A mirror effect in which the display content on the surface 523a2 can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror (mirror) 298 is configured to be executable. Accordingly, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side thereof can be used for the effect at the same time, so that the effect variation can be increased. Yes, it can improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute a mirror effect is a half mirror (a so-called magic mirror), and when viewed from the bright side, light is reflected and becomes a mirror (mirror). However, when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and becomes like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the mirror rear side LED 297, the rear side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass).

  In the present control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523 a 1, 523 a 2) which is reversed and ready for display is prepared (after the display content is reversed), the mirror front LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 was configured to function as a mirror (mirror). Thereby, the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display preparation is not made visible to the player, so that a suitable effect can be provided.

  Here, the effect of the mirror effect in the present control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a mirror effect in the present control example. FIG. 139 (a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to a close position, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the mirror effect in the present control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction to be changed to the close position, and the close position is changed. In the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted, and the upper decorative surfaces (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  A left mirror 298a is disposed on the left rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is disposed on the right rear side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are disposed so as to be inclined rearward (rear side) toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from above. (See FIG. 139 (b)). Therefore, the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 disposed closer to the center than each mirror 298 can be visually recognized from the front side via the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298.

  A right mirror front LED 296a is arranged on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and a left mirror front LED 296b is arranged on the front side of the left mirror 298b. A left rear mirror LED 297a is disposed on the rear side of the left mirror 298a, and a right rear mirror LED 297b is disposed on the rear side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are each configured by a magic mirror, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is turned on, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror, and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 or The decoration mode can be displayed. In a state where the left mirror rear LED 297a is turned on, the rear side of the magic mirror is visible through the transparent mirror (not a mirror but a transparent member), and does not form a mirror surface. Is configured. The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

  With such a configuration, the state of the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state in which the player can visually recognize the state and a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 cannot be visually recognized, thereby providing the player with a fresh effect. Can be.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The third control example is different from the first control example in that the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device. The difference is that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 141A, the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d, and the other points are the same. It is. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 141 (b), the contents of the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 will be described. The mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 is a scenario for flipping the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 after sliding them.

  The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 has a set value (operating speed (pps) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide motor 431 is specified as an operation target, the operation speed is specified as 50 pps, and the number of operation steps is determined in accordance with the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. Is defined as 100, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Corresponding to the value "2001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

  Corresponding to the value "8001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

  Corresponding to the value "10001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, a reversing motor 531 is specified as an operation target, 50 pps is specified as an operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and a negative direction is specified as an operation direction. ing.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “12001” of the driving scenario counter 223m.

  As described above, in the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and from the normal position to the reflection position (display surface (523a1 523a2) is inverted over 2 seconds to a position where it can be visually recognized from the front side via the mirror 298, and then maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again from the reflection position to the normal position over 2 seconds. It reverses and slides over 2 seconds from the approach position to the separation position.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a mirror effect flag 223s is added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The mirror effect flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. If the flag is on, it indicates that the mirror effect is being executed. If the flag is off, the mirror effect is being executed. Indicates no. This mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145) (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern). Is set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is ON, in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), the turning on / off of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 is performed, and the display content is inverted with respect to the display control device 114. A notification of a command to cause the notification is issued. In addition, although illustration is omitted, it is set to off when the variable display in which the mirror effect is executed ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. This control example is different from the first control example in that the main processing 3 (see FIG. 143) is changed to execute the mirror effect setting processing (see FIG. 143), and the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 106). In that a variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 3, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed similarly to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the processing of S1811, the mirror effect setting processing is executed (S1851), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above.

  Here, the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) includes controlling the turning on / off of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297, and issuing a command for inverting the display content to the display control device 114 when the mirror effect is being executed. This is a process for performing notification.

  In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. In the process of S1851, if it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is off (S5301: No), the mirror process is not executed, and thus the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is ON (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). In the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF to prevent the mirror 298 from functioning as a mirror (S5303). ), The mirror back LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and the process ends.

  In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), then, it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

  In the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close position. This is the timing when the inversion operation is completed at the close position. In this case, by performing the reversing operation, the display surface (523 a 1, 523 a 2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front side via the mirror 298. Transition.

  In the processing of S5306, the display inversion correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is turned on (S5307), and the mirror rear LED 297 is turned off (S5308), and this processing ends. As a result, the display contents of the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) are reversed symmetrically (that is, the display contents become normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes brighter. Will function as a mirror.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

  In the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is a timing at which the display surface facing the rear side is inverted to the front side in the mirror effect. .

  In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5310), the mirror back LED 297 is set to on (S5311), the display inversion correction end command is set (S5312), and the process ends.

  By the processing from S5310 to S5312, the display contents of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 controlled by the display control device 114 are set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set to a state where it does not function as a mirror. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

  In the process of S5313, if it is determined that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), it is the end timing of the mirror effect, and the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5314). The back LED 297 is set to off (S5315), and the process ends.

  By the processing of S5313 and S5314, when the mirror effect is not performed, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 can be turned off, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the variable display setting process 3 (S1813), the processes from S2301 to S2307 are executed as in the first control example. After the processing of S2307, it is determined whether the driving scenario stored in the processing of S2306 is a driving scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

  In the process of S2351, if it is determined that the driving scenario is a driving scenario corresponding to a mirror effect (S2351: Yes), it means that a variation pattern including a mirror effect has been set, so the mirror effect flag 223s Is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2351, if it is determined that the driving scenario is not a driving scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2308.

  After S2308, the processes from S2308 to S2312 are executed as in the above-described first control example, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display surface are displayed. A mirror effect in which the display content on the surface 523a2 can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror (mirror) 298 is configured to be executable. Accordingly, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side thereof can be used for the effect at the same time, so that the effect variation can be increased. Yes, it can improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (a so-called magic mirror). This is such that, when viewed from the bright side, light is reflected and becomes a mirror (mirror), but when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and becomes like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the mirror rear side LED 297, the rear side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass). Thus, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

  When functioning as a window, by providing a pattern or pattern on the back side of the mirror 298 so as to be visible, an effect integrated with the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be obtained. Further, an effect LED on the rear side may be arranged, and the lighting pattern of the effect LED may be changed so that a pattern or a pattern that can be visually recognized when the mirror 298 functions as a window may be changed. As a result, the variation of the effect can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523 a 1, 523 a 2) which is reversed and ready for display is prepared (after the display content is reversed), the mirror front LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror (mirror). Thereby, the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display preparation is not made visible to the player, so that a suitable effect can be provided.

  It should be noted that, in the mirror effect, whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or not may be indicated (notified) as to the degree of expectation to be a big hit. Thereby, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversed at the close position, the upper display surface Since it can be noticed whether or not the display contents of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed via the mirror 298, the interest of the player can be improved.

<Modification of Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modification of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described. In the present control example, when performing a mirror effect of causing the player to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, a left back mirror member 299a is provided between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved to project (reflect) the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With this configuration, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted to a position facing in parallel with the third symbol display device 81, the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be visually recognized by a player. Therefore, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode can be visually recognized by the player with the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely flattened.

<Regarding Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150, a modification of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described. FIGS. 148 to 150 are different from the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example in that the order in which the symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, and lower symbol) overlap is different. This is used for a technique (so-called probable promotion promotion) that uses a staging display to indicate whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot or a probable change jackpot after displaying that the symbol has won the jackpot in a third pattern. is there.

  In this case, when the probable change promotion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (the upper display surface 523a1 and the upper display surface 523a1). The lower display surface 523a2 is slid so that the lower display surface 523a2 is in contact with the lower display surface 523a2), and a message indicating that “probable change promotion effect” is started is displayed on the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), one promotion effect design is enlarged and displayed. The promotion effect symbols displayed in this case are different from the third symbols displayed in correspondence with the normal game (special symbol change game), and are character symbols from which the portions indicating the numbers have been deleted. In the case where the character symbol displayed in this state is in the same mode (character) as the “probable variable symbol” (a symbol with specific numbers, for example, “3” and “7”) used in the normal game. , An effect display indicating that the player has won the certainty jackpot by the “probable change promotion effect”.

  On the other hand, if the character symbol displayed in this state has the same form (character) as the symbol other than the “probable variable symbol” used in the normal game, the “probable variable promotion” is not performed to notify that the character has won the probability variable jackpot. Direction "continues.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to 150 (b), the display area is gradually enlarged by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the display area is extended to the state of FIG. 150 (b). When the character is enlarged, a mode in which a number is given to some of the character designs (for example, the character design displayed in the center) among the three character designs displayed vertically is provided.

  If the number given in this case is a number (for example, “3” or “7”) added to the “probable change symbol” used in the normal game, the user is won by the “probable change promotion effect” to win the probable change jackpot. This is an effect display indicating that. In other words, a character similar to the third symbol used in the normal game is used as the character symbol used in the “probable change promotion effect”, and a plurality of numbers (at least, “probable symbol”) are attached to the character symbol. (A number attached to a number other than the “positive change symbol”).

  According to the “probable change promotion effect” described above, the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148 (a)) and the timing at which the character symbol is indicated by a numeral (FIG. 150 (b) )), It is possible to notify that the winning in the jackpot has been won. Therefore, during the period from the start of the “probable change promotion effect” to the end of the process, the player will pay close attention to the effect while expecting to be promoted to the probability change jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned “probable change promotion effect”, the character symbols displayed in the up and down direction are each provided with a mode indicating a number, and the number assigned to each character symbol is a predetermined rule (the number is added to the footprint). In such a case, an odd number may be obtained, or if a number satisfies a predetermined rule (for example, “341”), it may be notified that a winning has been achieved in the probability change jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to more effectively use the enlargement of the display area for the effect.

  In addition, the timing at which the figures indicating the numbers are given to the three vertically displayed character symbols is shifted, or the three vertically displayed character patterns are switched during the “probable change promotion effect”. You may do so.

<About the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as a command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is provided. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. The sound ramp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time after receiving the closing command. Thus, the number of commands transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

  First, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a big hit flag 223t, and a time counter 223u are added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is open, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is open, indicating that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is in the closed state, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to) enter the specific winning opening 65a. Is shown. The specific winning port state 223p is set to an open state (see S5306 in FIG. 156) when it is determined that it is the round start timing in the jackpot game timing processing (see FIG. 156), and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a. When the close command based on the close is received, the closed state is set (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether or not the command is based on an over-winning prize.

  The big hit flag 223t is a flag for determining whether or not the big hit game is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the big hit game is being executed, and when it is off, the big hit game is being executed. Indicates no. The big hit flag 223t is set to ON when an opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, it is referred to in the jackpot timing process (see FIG. 156) to determine whether or not a jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the jackpot game. , Is set to off (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that a jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which a part of the process is changed instead of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed. An ending process 4 (S1110) in which some processes are changed instead of the processes (see FIG. 96) is different, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and the other points are the same. Detailed description is omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the start of the round is determined by measuring the elapsed time from the reception of the close command indicating the end of the round in the audio lamp control device 113. This eliminates the need for the round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game from the main control device 110, and can reduce the processing load.

  Next, the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that no ending command is set, and the other points are the same.

  Although the details will be described later, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the start of the ending by counting the elapsed time from the reception of the close command indicating the end of the round and the number of executed rounds. I have. Thereby, the ending command indicating the start of the ending in the big hit game from the main control device 110 can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that a jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) in which a part of the process is changed in place of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103) is executed. (See FIG. 156) is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 4, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S1811 is completed, a jackpot timing process is performed (S1831), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot timing process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) is different from the first control example in that when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, the jackpot during-hit flag 223t is set to ON, and a specific prize during the jackpot game is performed. Based on the reception of the closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed, based on the reception of the closing command, the elapsed time from the reception of the closing command is measured. The difference is that the processing is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), a display opening command is set. Then (S2002), the big hit flag is set to ON (S2071), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the processing of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2072).

  In the processing of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning processing is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, so the normal winning command is This is set (S2010), and this process ends.

  In the processing of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received (S2073).

  In the processing of S2073, when it is determined that the close command is received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the time counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), End this processing.

  By the process of S2075, the time counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Thereby, the elapsed time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed can be measured.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2073 that the close command has not been received (S2073: No), the processing of S2014 to S2015 is executed as in the first control example, and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the jackpot timing process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. The jackpot timing process (S1831) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process for timing to determine the round start timing and the ending timing in the jackpot game.

  In the big hit timing process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 223t is ON (S5301). If it is determined that the big hit flag 223t is turned off (S5301: No), it is not during the big hit game, and there is no need to perform timekeeping.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 223t is ON (S5301: Yes), the value of the time counter 223u is added by 1 (S5302), and the added value of the time counter 223u is added. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing (S5303).

  Specifically, if the value of the time counter 223u is 4000, four seconds have elapsed since the end of the round, it is determined that it is the round start timing.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), a display round number command is set (S5305), and the specific winning is achieved. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5303 that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), then it is determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

  Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the time counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the time counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the close command in the final round. Then, it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

  In the case where the ending effect is to be started a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed in the final round, the user may wait until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

  In the process of S5307, when it is determined that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the ending setting process similar to the first control example (see FIG. 105) is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the big hit flag 223t is set to off (S5310), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly used. The control device 110 is configured to transmit the signal to the audio lamp control device 113. The sound ramp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time after receiving the closing command. Thus, the number of commands transmitted from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the open / close display effect in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this manner, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed. Is done. On the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking. This shows that the middle symbol, which is the reach display mode, is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding up and down with each other. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A fish school effect (an effect in which a school of fish is fluctuated) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. In this way, the school of fish is displayed such that the area where the medium symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the medium symbol is not displayed is configured to move and display a large group of fish. I have. With this configuration, the school of fish can be displayed fluctuating according to the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school of fish can be moved by effectively using the display area that is extended by sliding. The area to be used can be widened.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid left and right (slids outward in the left and right direction). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed. Is done. On the lower right part of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking. This shows that the middle symbol, which is the reach display mode, is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward from each other. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A fish school effect (an effect in which a school of fish is fluctuated) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. In this way, the school of fish is displayed such that the area where the medium symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the medium symbol is not displayed is configured to move and display a large group of fish. I have. With this configuration, the school of fish can be displayed fluctuating according to the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school of fish can be moved by effectively using the display area that is extended by sliding. The area to be used can be widened.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 157 to the state shown in FIG. 158, the rotation coordinates and the display coordinates of the display data of the same fish school effect are corrected and set, so that the display is performed. It is configured to be. Thus, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, and the data amount can be suppressed.

  The present invention may be applied to the above control examples or a pachinko machine of a type different from the control examples. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above control examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 are connected to be relatively displaceable>
In a gaming machine having one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member that is slid and displaced by being guided by the one side member and the other side member on one side and the other side, respectively. , The slide member, one side guided member guided by the one side member, another side guided member guided by the other side member, between the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion A rotatable member rotatably supported by the rotatable member, wherein an allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is an allowable state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

  Here, one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member that is slid and displaced by being guided on one side and the other side by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application is a slide member, one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A structure formed from a rotating member rotatably supported between the members has been devised (unknown at the time of filing the present application). According to such a configuration, the rotation member can rotate as well as slide displacement, so that variations in the effect operation can be increased. Further, by the rotation of the rotating member, for example, not only the front side but also the back side of the rotating member can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, in such a configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the sliding member is slid and displaced with respect to the one side member and the other side member due to an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation. . That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the allowable state of the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is different from the allowable state of the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When an inertial force caused by the start of rotation or the stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and the slide member is connected to the one-side member and the other-side member. Can be suppressed from being slid. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  As a configuration for forming the relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equal to the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between them, and a form in which relative displacement is possible due to elastic deformation of the elastic body. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

  Further, as the form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is different, when the relative displacement is easy (the force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or when these are combined. For example.

  In the gaming machine A1, a rotation drive unit for rotating the rotation member is provided, and a relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is a relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. The gaming machine A2, wherein the rotation driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other member. Since the rotation driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member whose relative displacement is easily allowed, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be converted to the one-side member or the other-side member. In the case of a force (braking force) for pressing against, the pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotary drive means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  Examples of the form in which the relative displacement is easily tolerated include, for example, a case where the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, a case where the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and a case where these are combined. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A2, the rotation drive means is provided on an outer surface side of the one-side guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, wherein the rotating drive means is provided.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, so that On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation drive means can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side guided member. Accordingly, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the rotational inertia of the rotary drive unit can be more easily used. Thus, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a pair of the slide members is disposed to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are displaced in a direction approaching each other, one of the slide members is disposed. The side guided member is disposed opposite to the other guided member of the other slide member, and the other guided member of the one slide member is disposed opposite to the one guided member of the other slide member. A gaming machine A4 characterized by the following.

  Here, when a pair of slide members are disposed to face each other along the direction of slide displacement, and are slid and displaced toward each other, when they are opposed to each other at the center position, there is no gap between them at the center position. If the slide members are brought into contact with each other, the load on the drive means (motor) for slidingly displacing the slide members increases, which causes damage to the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism (gear, etc.).

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a margin at a position where both are stopped in consideration of a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, or a control tolerance (set a sufficient gap between the two at the center position). Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player from the gap, and the appearance (production effect) is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, since the pair of slide members are disposed facing each other in a staggered direction, the sliding members are slid and displaced in a direction approaching each other. When the slide members come into contact with each other at the position, the one guided member on one side and the other slide member is retracted to receive the other guided member on the other (other and one) slide member. (The pair of slide members can be inclined with respect to the direction of the slide displacement based on the difference between the allowable states of the relative displacement described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members abut at the center position, damage to the drive means and the drive force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the position for stopping both can be set to a closer position. As a result, at the center position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between each other, and the appearance (effect effect) can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member provided with the one-side member and the other-side member, a sensor device provided on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device Wherein the detected member is disposed on the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member is set to be less allowable than the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member. Since the detected member is provided, even if the posture of the slide member changes, the displacement of the detected member with respect to the base member (sensor device) can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member with respect to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one-side guided members 521 are arranged to face each other is an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, wherein an inertial force accompanying displacement of the displacement member is provided. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses the base member from rotating with respect to the base.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a member formed to be displaceable is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  In this case, for example, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is provided on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (unknown at the time of filing the present application), the start or displacement of the displacement of the displacement member is performed. There is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base by the inertial force accompanying the stop of the base member. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the suppression means for suppressing the rotation of the base member with respect to the base due to the inertial force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the rotation of the displacement member is started or stopped. When the inertia force associated with is applied to the base member, the base member can be prevented from rotating with respect to the base. That is, while the base member is stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base, the rotation member can be easily rotated or the slide member can be easily slid.

  The mode of the displacement is not particularly limited, and examples include a rotational displacement, a swing displacement, a slide displacement, and a displacement in a combination thereof. The locus of the slide displacement may be any of a straight line, a curve, and a locus combining these. Further, the direction of the displacement may be indefinite. For example, a mode may be adopted in which the displacement member is elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member is displaced by the elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced by one side member, the other side member disposed to face the one side member, and the one side and the other side guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. And a slide member, wherein the slide member is a one-side guided member guided by the one-side member, another side guided member guided by the other-side member, and the one-side guided portion and A rotatable member rotatably supported between the other-side guided portions, wherein an allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is such that the other-side member with respect to the other-side member. Different from the permissible state of relative displacement of the guide member, the pair of slide members includes one guided member and one guided member on one side of the slide member, and one guided member and another on the other side of the slide member. The side guided member Gaming machine B2, characterized in that disposed in a posture respectively opposed.

  Here, one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member that is slid and displaced by being guided on one side and the other side by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application is a slide member, one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotatable member rotatably supported between, and if the allowable state of the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to one side member is different from the allowable state of the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. A configuration was devised (unknown at the time of filing the present application). According to this configuration, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the rotating member is applied to the sliding member, the sliding member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member. And it can suppress being slid with respect to the other side member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In this case, the present applicant has devised a configuration in which the above-described one-side member and the other-side member are disposed on a base member, and the base member is rotatably supported by a base (unknown at the time of filing the present application). According to this configuration, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation member can be changed in accordance with the rotation position of the base member. .

  However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one of the slide members may be displaced when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotary member is applied to the slide member. The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the other slide member are alternately oriented (point-symmetrical direction that gives rotational inertia to the base member). Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, the pair of slide members is formed by the one guided member and the other guided member of one slide member and the other slide member. Since the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are disposed so as to face each other, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the rotating member is applied to the sliding member, A displacement component orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the other slide member and a displacement component orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the other slide member can be in the same direction (line-symmetrical direction), and the base member is a base. Can be suppressed from being rotated. That is, while the base member is stopped at a predetermined rotation position with respect to the base, the rotation member can be easily rotated or the slide member can be easily slid.

  As a configuration for forming the relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equal to the gap. A form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, or the like) is interposed between them, and a form in which relative displacement is possible due to elastic deformation of the elastic body. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

  Further, as the form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is different, when the relative displacement is easy (the force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or when these are combined. For example.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is configured to be more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontally moved. When the slide member is slid in the direction, the rotation of the base member with respect to the base is performed such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is positioned substantially vertically above the other-side guided member. A gaming machine B3 whose position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When the slide member is slid in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base is so positioned that the slide member forms a posture in which one guided member is positioned substantially vertically above the other guided member. Since the rotational position is set, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the rotation member is applied to the slide member, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (the slide member is moved to one side) The displacement component for applying a force (braking force) pressing the member or the other member can be vertically downward (gravity direction). Thereby, when rotating the rotating member, the lifting of the slide member can be suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  Examples of the form in which the relative displacement is easily tolerated include, for example, a case where the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, a case where the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and a case where these are combined. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is configured to be more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontally moved. When the slide member is slid in the direction, the one-side guided member is formed such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is positioned substantially vertically below the other-side guided member. A gaming machine B4 in which a rotational position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When the slide member is slid in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base is formed such that the slide member forms a posture in which one guided member is positioned substantially vertically below the other guided member. Is set, a displacement component (slide member) in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement when an inertial force caused by the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member. (A displacement component for applying a force (braking force) that presses the one side member or the other side member) can be vertically upward (in a direction opposite to the direction of gravity). Accordingly, when the slide member is slid, the resistance due to the action of gravity is reduced, and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the wear of the sliding portion due to the sliding displacement.

  Examples of the form in which the relative displacement is easily tolerated include, for example, a case where the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, a case where the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and a case where these are combined. Is exemplified.

  The gaming machine B3, further comprising: a rotary drive unit for rotating the rotary member, wherein the rotary drive unit is disposed on the one-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, the rotation driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member in which relative displacement is easily allowed as compared with the other-side guided member. When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of displacement is used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the pressing force is increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotary drive unit. can do. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is easy to suppress the slide member from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein the gaming machine B4 includes a rotary drive unit for rotating the rotating member, and the rotary drive unit is disposed on the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement can be vertically upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity). Since the rotation drive means is provided on the other guided member in a form in which relative displacement is hardly allowed as compared with the guide member, the rotation drive means is driven in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement due to the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. Can be suppressed from becoming too large. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be prevented from being slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed and the slide member can be slid. Abrasion of the sliding portion due to displacement can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine B7, wherein in the gaming machine B5, the rotation drive means is disposed on an outer surface side of the one-side guided member opposite to the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, since the rotation drive means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, the one-side member On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation drive means can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side guided member. Accordingly, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the rotational inertia of the rotary drive unit can be more easily used. Thus, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is easy to suppress the slide member from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is provided on an outer surface side of the other-side guided member opposite to the other-side member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other-side guided member opposite to the other-side member. When the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotation driving means can be located at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. Thus, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotary drive unit. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be prevented from being slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed and the slide member can be slid. Abrasion of the sliding portion due to displacement can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotation shaft 4523c is eccentric is taken as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a slide member slidably formed between a first position and a second position, the game machine is disposed to face a slide member disposed at the first position from a side opposite to the second position. And an effect means for effecting between the opposing member and the slide member. The slide member is rotatably formed by a rotary shaft eccentrically located along the direction of the slide displacement. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that:

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a slide member formed so as to be slidable between a first position and a second position is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application includes an opposing member disposed opposite to the slide member disposed at the first position from a side opposite to the second position, and an effect unit for performing an effect between the opposing member and the opposing slide member. A gaming machine was devised (unknown at the time of filing the present application). However, in the above-described configuration, if the interval between the opposing member and the slide member arranged at the first position is small, the effect by the effect means cannot be sufficiently performed (for example, the movement of the member for the effect). A space cannot be secured, or an area for visually recognizing members for a performance cannot be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member protrudes toward the second position side, so that the slide member is located on the path of the slide displacement of the slide member. (For example, a liquid crystal display device) causes a reduction in the visible region. When the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member increases, which causes an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotating shaft eccentrically located along the direction of the slide displacement. Can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the distance between the opposing member and the opposing member is increased, the effect by the effect means can be sufficiently performed, while the slide member is moved to the rotation position where the distance between the opposing member and the opposing member is reduced. By rotating the slide member, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position can be reduced, and a visible area of another member can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the size of the entire apparatus can be reduced.

  In addition, as the effect means, for example, a member that is formed to be displaceable using the space between the opposing member and the sliding member is displaced, and the opposing member is changed to the space between the opposing member and the sliding member. Examples include a device that displaces by utilizing, a device that allows the display or decoration on the back side to be visually recognized from the space between the facing member and the sliding member, a device that irradiates light to the space between the facing member and the sliding member, and a combination thereof. You.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 includes an irradiating unit that irradiates light toward a space between the facing member and the slide member.

  Here, for example, in a configuration in which the opposing member irradiates light toward the space between the slide member and the opposing member, an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light reflected by the slide member from the space between the slide member and the opposing member. It can be carried out.

  In this case, in the above-described configuration, if the distance between the opposing member and the slide member disposed at the first position is small, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be sufficiently viewed by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member protrudes toward the second position side, so that the slide member is located on the path of the slide displacement of the slide member. (For example, a liquid crystal display device) causes a reduction in the visible region. When the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member increases, which causes an increase in size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the sliding member is formed rotatably by the rotating shaft that is eccentrically located along the direction of the sliding displacement. Accordingly, the interval between the opposing members can be increased or decreased. In other words, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the opposing member increases, the light emitted from the irradiation unit can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, while the slide member faces the opposing member. By rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the interval is reduced, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position can be reduced, and a visible area of another member can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the size of the entire apparatus can be reduced.

  The position of the irradiating means is such that the irradiating means is arranged on the opposing member so as to be able to irradiate the sliding member, the irradiating means is arranged on the sliding member so as to be able to irradiate the opposing member, between the opposing member and the sliding member A mode in which irradiation is provided on the back side between the opposing surfaces and a mode in which these are combined are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a gaming machine C3 including a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member being disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for rotation of the base member with respect to the base while maintaining the slide member at the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required for rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C3, a pair of the sliding members are disposed to face each other along the direction of the sliding displacement.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C3, a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members can be arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be made closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. Thus, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be easily made effective.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, if the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is a rotation in a direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member causes the position of the center of gravity to move to the base. A gaming machine C5, which is distant from the center of rotation of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is a rotation in a direction to lower the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member Since the position of the center of gravity is kept away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for rotating the base member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is a rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member changes the position of the center of gravity. A gaming machine C6 wherein the rotation center of the base member with respect to the base is approached.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, the sliding member Since the rotation brings the position of the center of gravity closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for rotating the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the overhanging wall portion 5640 having the opening 5641 is formed as an example>
In a gaming machine having a passage member surrounding a spherical object and formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member includes an opening formed on a side surface thereof, and the object is partially formed. A game machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass therethrough in a state where it protrudes outside from the opening.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can flow in from one end side, pass through the back side of the game area, and then be discharged from the other end side into the game area. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a problem that the movable range of the effecting member disposed to be displaceable on the rear side of the game area is limited by the extent that the passage member projects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member has the opening formed on the side surface thereof, and is formed so that the object can pass through with a part thereof protruding outside from the opening. Therefore, the protrusion of the passage member can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entirety of the target object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side. Therefore, a space for disposing other members and a movable range of other members can be secured accordingly.

  The cross-sectional shape of the passage member is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a circular cross section, an elliptical cross section, a polygonal cross section, and a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the pair of openings are disposed to face the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with the pair of openings facing each other, so that the facing distance between the side surfaces on which the pair of openings is formed is reduced. Accordingly, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D1 or D2, an inclined surface is formed in the passage member on an inner surface side of a periphery of the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inclined surface is formed on the inner surface side of the periphery of the opening in the passage member. The thickness of the passage member at the periphery of the opening is ensured while suppressing the protrusion of the passage member by increasing the amount of protrusion that allows the portion to protrude from the opening to the outside, and the rigidity of the passage member is improved. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is characterized in that a distance between base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction perpendicular to a direction in which the object passes is set to a dimension at least smaller than a diameter of the object. Gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the object passes is at least smaller than the diameter of the object. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the object from being received only at the tip (the inner peripheral end) of the inclined surface when the object projects a part of the object from the opening to the outside. That is, since the ball can be received at the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, breakage of the passage member (the periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular shape in cross section from four walls, and the opening is formed in at least one of the four walls. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from the four wall portions, and is provided on at least one of the four wall portions. Since the opening is formed, the sectional modulus of the passage member can be secured, and the rigidity of the passage member can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and a line segment connecting the circular cross section with two points on the curve. The gaming machine D6, wherein the opening is formed by cutting the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the target object, and the path member has Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the protrusion of the passage member can be minimized. As a result, an arrangement space for other members and a movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage member may be configured such that a passage of the object is curved or bent, and the opening may be a direction of a centrifugal force acting on the object due to the curved or bent of the passage. A gaming machine D7 formed on the side of the passage member opposite to the side.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a passage in which the opening is formed on the opposite side to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the bending or bending of the passage. In other words, since the opening is formed on the side surface opposite to the side surface against which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, wear or breakage of the peripheral edge of the opening portion can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the game machine includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable, and the displacement member extends to at least a range including at least a displacement trajectory of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8 formed to be displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the gaming machine D8 includes a displaceable displacement member, and the displacement member moves a part of the displacement trajectory of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. Since the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least up to the included range, the displacement region of the displacement member can be enlarged by effectively utilizing the region where the protrusion of the passage member is reduced. As a result, the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

  The displacement member may be formed so that a part thereof can be displaced from the opening of the passage member to a position where the displacement member is inserted into the inside of the passage member. In this case, the displacement area of the displacement member can be maximized, and the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, the displacing member can be displaced further forward, so that the displacing member can be made more powerful by approaching the player.

  The gaming machine D8 includes a detection unit that detects the presence or absence of an object in at least the area where the opening of the passage member is formed, and when the object is detected by the detection unit, the displacement member A gaming machine D9 that is restricted from being displaced to at least a range including the displacement trajectory.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in at least the area where the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member is at least displaced (path member). (A displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening) is restricted from being displaced to at least a range, so that the displacement member can be prevented from interfering with the object.

  In the gaming machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch which are disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, respectively, and which detects passage of the object at each of the disposed positions. A gaming machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D9, the detecting means is disposed upstream and downstream from the opening of the passage member, and detects the passage of the target object at each of the disposed positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of the target in at least the area where the opening of the passage member is formed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

<Feature E group> (produced with over-winning game balls)
Based on a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, a variable member capable of being changed to one state for restricting the entry of a game ball into the ball-entering means and a second state in which the regulation is released, and the establishment of specific conditions. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game in which the variable member is changed from the first state to the second state; and a bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Counting means for counting the number of played balls, and a variable for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the count value of the counting means reaching a predetermined upper limit. Means and an effect executing means for executing an effect based on a game ball entering the ball input means before being changed to the second state by the variable means, and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means. Act The effect determination unit includes a determining unit, a is the gaming machine and wherein the when special conditions are satisfied, in which is configured to be able to determine the particular representation embodiment E1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state occurs, a large opening provided on the board is set to an open state. By causing a game ball to be awarded to the large opening, a prize ball is given to the player, which is advantageous to the player by being in a hit state. Note that the large opening is set to a closed state where it becomes difficult for game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls wins after being set to the open state. In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines execute a special effect (over-winning effect) when a winning of more than a specified number of gaming balls is detected in a large opening state with one open state. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the over-winning effect is executed, it merely makes the player recognize that a slightly larger number of prize balls has been acquired than usual, and the player's interest is sufficiently reduced. In some cases, it could not be improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, it is possible to change between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter and a first state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted to the ball entry means and a second state in which the regulation is released. A variable member, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on establishment of a specific condition, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. In the case where it is determined, the counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry means, and the variable member based on that the count value by the counting means has reached a predetermined upper limit value, Variable means for changing from the second state to the first state, and an effect for executing an effect based on a game ball entering the ball-entering means before being changed to the second state by the variable means. Execution means and its production Anda effect determination means for determining an effect to be performed by the row unit, the effect determination unit, when special conditions are satisfied, and is configured to be able to determine the special effect mode.

  As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition unit for acquiring information, the storage unit for storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the storage unit based on the establishment of the determination condition are stored in the storage unit. A discriminating means for discriminating information; and a specific condition satisfying means for satisfying the specific condition when a discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result, wherein the special condition is stored in the storage means by the discriminating means. The gaming machine E2, characterized in that the storage of the information determined to be a specific determination result is set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2. That is, the information is stored in the storage unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage unit storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the storage unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. A determination unit for determining information; and a specific condition establishment unit configured to satisfy the specific condition when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. The special condition is stored in the storage unit. It is set as at least one condition that the information determined as a specific determination result by the means is stored.

  This allows the player to recognize that the information as the specific determination result is stored in the storage means by performing the effect in the special effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in expectation of the effect of the special effect mode being executed, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is satisfied at a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination unit. Machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the special condition is determined by a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by the determination unit. Therefore, even if the effect of the special effect mode is not executed in the privilege game, there is a possibility that information that is a specific determination result is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even when the effect of the special effect mode is not executed, the player can be caused to play a game in expectation of storing information serving as a specific determination result. There is an effect that motivation can be maintained.

  The gaming machine E4, wherein the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 executes an effect using the gaming balls counted by the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes the effect using the gaming balls counted by the counting means. This has the effect that the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where a configuration for performing an effect separately from the game ball is provided.

  The gaming machine E5, wherein the special effect mode in the gaming machine E4 includes a mode in which the gaming balls counted by the counting means are guided to a specific area configured to be visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode is a mode in which the game balls counted by the counting means are guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Therefore, a game can be played while paying attention to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A gaming machine E6 having an audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means is provided. Effect can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  As one of the effects executed by the effect execution means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, a game machine E7 having display means for displaying a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the game machine has display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. There is a visual effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the end effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means A gaming machine E8 comprising: an end effect mode determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7. That is, an end effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege effect execution means, and an end effect mode determination for determining a mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. And means for allowing the player to easily understand the end of the privilege game.

<Characteristic F group> (Forming an accessory by inverting the sub liquid crystal)
Effect executing means for executing an effect based on the discrimination information, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, and the effect on the back side of the first display area The display mode is displayed as one of the effects performed by the first display unit having the first specific notification unit for notifying the player of the specific notification mode as one of the effects and the effect executed by the effect execution unit. A second display unit having a second display area, and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area; the first display area and the second display area And a second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific informing unit and the second specific informing unit, respectively. 1 display means and the second display means Gaming machine F1 characterized by having a displacement means capable of displacing the.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member, and the like, and are capable of performing various effecting operations by a display effect and a movable effect. Some conventional gaming machines employ a technique for ensuring the visibility of a display effect even when, for example, a movable member moves to the front side of the display device during the execution of the display effect. (For example, JP-A-2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it was not assumed that the orientation of the display device itself could be changed. For this reason, if the display device itself is variably operated, an appropriate effect operation using the display effect may not be realized. That is, it may be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the determination information, and a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. A first display unit having a first specific notification unit for notifying a player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area; As one of the effects, a second display having a second display area in which a display mode is displayed and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area Means, a first state in which the first display area and the second display area can be visually recognized by the player, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section to the player, respectively. 2nd state that can be visually recognized Also has a displacement means capable of displacing said second display means and said first display means.

  Thus, a plurality of effects in different modes can be realized using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased.

  In the second state in the gaming machine F1, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes notified by the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section, respectively. A gaming machine F2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the notification mode notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit is combined to perform the identification. Is formed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is configured with a specific symbol, and the first specific notification unit displays a part of the specific symbol, and the second specific notification unit displays the specific symbol. In the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. The gaming machine F3, wherein the specific symbol is formed by combining the gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F2. That is, the specific notification mode is configured with a specific symbol, the first specific notification unit displays a part of the specific symbol, and the second specific notification unit displays the specific symbol. In the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific symbol is formed.

  Accordingly, a specific symbol can be dynamically displayed using the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, and thus there is an effect that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first display means and the second display means have a third display means different from the first display means, and the effect execution means is provided in a third display area of the third display means. And displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the above. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are adjacent to or parallel to the third display area or at least partially overlap each other. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, the first display means and the second display means have third display means different from each other, and the effect execution means has a predetermined display in the third display area of the third display means as one of the effects. And displaying a display mode. In the first state, the first display region and the second display region are arranged in a position close to and parallel to or at least partially overlap with the third display region. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  When the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the effect executing means includes privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to a player, wherein the effect executing means includes The gaming machine F5, wherein the specific notification mode is easily executed when the effect of (1) is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, there is provided a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, the specific notification mode can be easily executed.

  Thereby, a game can be played in expectation of a specific notification mode being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determining condition in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, and an effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be executed by the effect executing means based on a determination result of the determining means And a gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, it has a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the fulfillment of the discriminating condition, and an effect deciding means for deciding an effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that various effect modes can be realized according to the determination result of the determination unit.

<Feature G group> (Display by moving the pattern of the main liquid crystal while moving the sub liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying a symbol, second display means different from the first display means, and at least the second display means at a position where the display area of the second display means overlaps the display area of the first display means. A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the first movable means capable of moving the display, the display control means for controlling the display of the first display means and the second display means, respectively, and the second display means. In the state, when the display area of the first display means is moved by the first movable means on the display area of the first display means, the display area of the first display means, which is exposed by the movement, is moved to the first display area. Display mode setting means for setting, in the display control section, a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means. Gaming machine 1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device for displaying main effects related to the game and a sub-display device for displaying auxiliary effects, the degree of freedom of display effects is increased, and the interest of the player is improved. (For example, JP-A-2014-117576).

  However, such conventional gaming machines still have room for improvement in terms of the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying symbols, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is the display area of the first display means. First movable means capable of moving at least the second display means at a position overlapping with the first display means, display control means for controlling display of the first display means and the second display means, respectively, and the second display means When the first movable means moves on the display area of the first display means in a state where a predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position, the display of the first display means which is exposed by being moved is displayed. A display mode setting for setting, in the display control section, a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display device after being moved with respect to an area. With means .

  Thereby, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the first display means and the second display means.

  In the gaming machine G1, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means and a display area of the third display means overlap with the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is provided. A second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to the same position, wherein the display control means is configured such that each of the second display means and the third display means is When being moved to the same position, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across one display area at one end as a boundary. Gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, a display area of the third display means overlaps with the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is the same as the second display means. A second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to a position to be a position, wherein the display control means is configured such that each of the second display means and the third display means is When being moved to the same position, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across the display areas with the one end as a boundary, based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  Thereby, since one symbol can be displayed using the second display means and the third display means, there is an effect that a display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting unit is configured to control the second display unit and the third display unit in a state where the specific display mode is displayed on the second display unit and the third display unit by the display control unit. The gaming machine G3, wherein the specific movable display mode is set when at least one of the display units is moved in a direction away from the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting unit displays the specific display mode on the second display unit and the third display unit by the display control unit. In the state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in a direction in which the second display means and the third display means are separated from each other, the specific display mode is set. According to the arrangement with the three display means, there is an effect that appropriate display contents can be displayed for each.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the first symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display unit and the second display unit, the first display unit and the first display unit. A gaming machine G4 set to be displayed on the third display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the first symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the first display means. Since the display is set to be displayed on the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means, respectively, the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means can be used more freely. There is an effect that a high degree of display content can be realized.

<Characteristic H group> (Right-handed notification in a rotating display device)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; A determination executing means for determining the information stored in the storage means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; a display means for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination means; and a display means specific to the display means. And a variable ball-in means for allowing game balls to enter when the identification information is displayed based on the result of the discrimination. And a first flow path through which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can flow down by the firing means, which is different from the first firing intensity. Games fired at a second firing intensity Flows down, and after the identification information based on the specific determination result and the second flow path in which the variable ball-in means is arranged is displayed, it is suggested that a game ball is fired to the second flow path. And a suggestion means for causing the display means to display the suggestion mode to be performed.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member, and the like, and are capable of performing various effecting operations by a display effect and a movable effect. Some of such conventional gaming machines can display a suggestion display image indicating a direction in which a game ball is launched on a display device. This conventional gaming machine employs a technique for ensuring the visibility of the suggestion display image even when, for example, the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during the display of the suggestion display image (for example, JP-A-2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, a case where the orientation of the display device is variable has not been assumed. For this reason, when the direction of the display device is changed, there is a possibility that the direction in which the game ball is launched cannot be properly notified.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the entry means, and an acquisition means for the information A storage unit for storing the acquired information, a determination execution unit for performing determination of the information stored in the storage unit based on establishment of a determination condition, and a determination unit based on a determination result by the determination unit. Display means for displaying identification information; and variable ball-in means for allowing game balls to enter when the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific determination result. In accordance with the operation of the player, based on the operation of the player, the firing intensity of the game ball can be changed and fired, and the game ball fired at the first firing intensity by the firing means flows down. A possible first flow path and the first firing power After the game ball fired at the second firing intensity different from the flowing down, the second flow path in which the variable ball input means is arranged, and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed, And a suggestion means for displaying on the display means a suggestion mode for suggesting that the game ball is fired to the second flow path.

  This allows the player who has confirmed the suggestion mode to fire the game ball at the second firing intensity, so that even a beginner of the game can easily insert the game ball into the variable ball-in means. Can be ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine in which the gaming method is more easily understood can be realized.

  In the gaming machine H1, in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, there is a rotation means capable of rotating the display means based on establishment of a rotation condition. A gaming machine H2 having at least a part of a ring shape and including a direction suggesting mode indicating a direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, in a state where the display area of the display unit faces the front side, the display unit includes a rotation unit that can rotate the display unit based on the satisfaction of a rotation condition. A direction suggesting mode having at least a part of the shape and indicating the direction of the second flow path is included.

  Thereby, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately indicated by the direction indicating mode having at least a part of the ring shape.

  The gaming machine H3, wherein the direction suggestion mode in the gaming machine H2 is such that the gaming ball is rotated in a direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path and is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, the direction suggesting mode is dynamically displayed by rotating the gaming ball in the direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path. On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is fired can be notified more easily.

  A gaming machine H4, wherein character information indicating that a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path in the gaming machine H2 or H3 is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that a gaming ball is to be fired to the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggesting mode. There is an effect that the player who visually recognizes the mode can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  The gaming machine H5, wherein the direction suggesting mode in any of the gaming machines H2 to H4 is displayed with a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggesting mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path. There is an effect that it is possible to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball is fired from the impression of.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is a reversing means for reversing the display means so that the back side is located on the player side, and a decoration portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is provided on the back side of the display means Is a gaming machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines H1 to H5. That is, there is a reversing means for reversing the display means so that the back side is located on the player side, and a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged on the back side of the display means. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can accurately understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order in the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is controlled to be turned on in order in the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order in the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means Since the lighting is controlled sequentially in the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

<Characteristic I group> (The sub liquid crystal is used as the main liquid crystal.)
Determining means for executing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a specific effect is provided to the effect execution means and the display means for causing the display means to execute a display of an effect mode associated with the identification information based on the determination result. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed based on the determination result; and in the gaming machine having the same, the display means comprises: a main display means; The sub-table, comprising at least a first position parallel to a display area and a sub-display means movable at least to a second position overlapping a front side of the display area of the main display means. Movable means capable of moving the means between the first position and the second position; and the identification information is displayed on the main display means when the sub-display means is movable at the first position. When the sub display is switched to a first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display, the sub display is moved to the second position, and a specific condition is satisfied. And a switching unit configured to switch and set a second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub-display unit.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device for displaying main effects related to the game and a sub-display device for displaying auxiliary effects, the degree of freedom of display effects is increased, and the interest of the player is improved. Is being planned. Further, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some gaming machines in which a sub-display device can be moved to the front side of a main display device and a composite display effect can be executed by the main display device and the sub-display device (for example, , JP-A-2015-029606).

  However, such conventional gaming machines still have room for improvement in terms of the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, a display means for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, display of an effect mode accompanying the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. Effect execution means to be executed, and privilege providing means for providing a benefit that is advantageous to a player when identification information is displayed based on the specific determination result on the display means, and The sub-display is movable at least to a main display, a first position parallel to a display area of the main display, and a second position overlapping a front side of the display area of the main display. And at least one step, wherein a movable means capable of moving the sub-display means between the first position and the second position, and wherein the sub-display means is moved to the first position. Is set to a first state in which the identification information is displayed on the main display means and at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display means, and the sub display means is movable to the second position. A switching unit configured to switch and set a second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub-display unit when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thus, the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched in accordance with the position of the sub-display means, so that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  In the gaming machine I1, the sub display means is constituted by at least a first display means arranged at one end of the main display means and a second display means arranged at the other end of the main display means. The gaming machine I2, wherein in the one position, the first display means and the second display means are positioned so as to oppose the main display means therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the sub display means is constituted by at least a first display means arranged at one end of the main display means and a second display means arranged at the other end of the main display means. In the position, the first display means and the second display means are positioned so as to oppose the main display means therebetween.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means at the first position can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means contact one end of each other to cover the display area of the main display means with difficulty in visual recognition. Gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact at one end with each other to display the main display means. Since the area is covered so as to be hardly visible, a compact display using only the sub-display means can be realized at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to display contents.

  A gaming machine I4, characterized in that the gaming machine I2 or I3 has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I2 or I3, since the first display means and the second display means each include a rotation means for rotating the main display means as a center, There is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized using the display means.

  In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, so that the first display means and the second display means are vertically aligned with the main display means. A gaming machine I5 characterized by being variable between a vertical position where it is located and a left and right position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, thereby vertically moving the main display means. The first display means and the second display means can be changed to a vertical position where the first display means and the second display means are located, and the left and right positions where the first display means and the second display means are located in the horizontal direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized using the sub display means.

  In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position, the sub display means and the main display means A first fusion display mode in which the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left / right position to the second position after the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left / right position to the second position. A gaming machine I6 comprising a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode which is fused and displayed by a display means and the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, a case where the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position. A first fusion display mode in which the sub-display means and the main display means are merged and displayed, and the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left-right position to the second position. Since there is provided a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode which is merged and displayed on the sub display means and the main display means when being moved to the left and right position later, There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether the display position is at the right or left position.

<Characteristic J group> (The display mode of the inverted sub liquid crystal is displayed with a mirror)
A determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and a display mode based on the specific determination result on the display means; In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means that gives a benefit that is advantageous to a player, the display means is at least constituted by a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the second display means A rotating means capable of rotating the second display means to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the rear side, and the first display means is rotated to the back position. When the first projection means and the second display means for projecting the presentation mode displayed on the first display means on the front side and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the display is displayed on the second display means. The performance Gaming machine J1, wherein those having a second projection means for projecting a manner on the front side.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined entertainment effect is selected, the projection device can be visually recognized, and by projecting the player's face and the like on the projection device, an impactful entertainment effect can be realized. (For example, JP 2005-329159 A).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an object to be projected on the projection device is limited because the projection device is simply set to a state that can be visually recognized by a player. Therefore, there have been cases where the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved using the projection device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fulfillment of the discriminating condition, display means for displaying an effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and specifying on the display means And a privilege granting means for granting a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the effect mode based on the determination result is displayed, wherein the display means comprises a first display means and a second display means. Rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side. And first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position, and wherein the second display means is at the back position. The field that was turned into To have a second projection means for projecting on the front side of the representation embodiment to be displayed on the second display means.

  Thereby, even if the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect mode displayed on each. That is, it is possible to realize a novel effect operation in which the first display means and the second display means can be rotated while the effect mode is visible, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means have a mirror surface portion capable of displaying the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means project the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the rear position, the player can clearly see the effect mode displayed on each of the first display means and the second display means via the mirror surface part. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine J2, the rotating means rotates the back position so that the first display means and the second display means are respectively V-shaped toward the front side of the gaming machine. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J2, the rotating means is such that the first display means and the second display means have a V-shape on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to each other as the back position. Since it is rotated to the position, the appearance can be greatly different from the front position by being the rear position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection unit and the second projection unit may be configured to perform the first projection when the first display unit and the second display unit are respectively rotated to the back position. A gaming machine J4 having a projection surface capable of facing a display area of a display means or a display area of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are arranged such that the first display means and the second display means are When rotated to the back position, it has a projection surface that can face the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means, so that the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the presentation mode displayed on the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

  The gaming machine J1 is arranged at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. The first diffractive means is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the second display means rotated to the back position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. A gaming machine J5, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1. That is, a first diffractive means arranged at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back position and diffracting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. And a second diffractive means disposed at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back position, and diffracting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projecting means. And

  Thereby, the arrangement of the first projecting unit and the second projecting unit can be freely determined within a range that can be diffracted by the first diffracting unit and the second diffracting unit, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first projection unit and the second projection unit can be increased.

  The gaming machine J6, wherein the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are half mirrors.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5, since the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are constituted by half mirrors, the display area of the first display means and the second It is possible to change whether or not the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means is diffracted. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased.

  In the gaming machine J5 or J6, when the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are respectively rotated by at least one of the first display means and the second display means to the back position, A gaming machine J7 comprising: display means or movable means for moving the display to a position facing the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first display means and the second display means is provided by the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. When the display device is rotated to the back position, the display device includes a movable unit that is movable to a position facing the first display unit or the second display unit, so that the effect is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Can be more accurately diffracted.

<Characteristic K group> (Over winning using close command)
Main control means for executing game control, slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, an open state where game balls can enter, and entry of game balls are regulated. A variable ball input means that can be changed to a restricted state, wherein the main control means performs a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition and performs an effect based on a determination result by the determination means. The variable ball entry means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on a result of determination by the effect information determining means for determining effect information and the determination means being a specific determination result. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, an establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and an incoming ball signal based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. Do A ball signal output means and a privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player based on a game ball entering the variable ball input means, and the slave control means is provided by the effect information determining means. Based on the determined presentation information, the presentation condition determining means for determining the presentation mode, the presentation execution means for executing the presentation mode determined by the presentation mode determination means, and the predetermined condition are received after receiving the establishment signal. A gaming machine K1 comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received during a period until the game is established.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state occurs, a large opening provided on the board is set to an open state. By causing a game ball to be awarded to the large opening, a prize ball is given to the player, which is advantageous to the player by being in a hit state. Note that the large opening is set to a closed state where it becomes difficult for game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls wins after being set to the open state. Some of such conventional gaming machines execute a special effect (over-winning effect) when a winning of a specified number or more of game balls is detected in a large open state with one open state. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved (for example, JP-A-2015-112239).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to count the number of gaming balls that have won a large opening in order to determine whether or not to execute an over-winning effect. It was common that the number of entering balls before the mouth was closed was different. Therefore, it is necessary to reset the condition of whether or not to execute the over-winning prize effect according to the model, so that the program adopted for one model cannot be diverted to another gaming machine as it is. Was. That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the main control means for executing the control of the game, the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening in which the game ball can enter. A variable ball entry means that can be changed to a state and a regulation state in which the entry of game balls is regulated, and the main control means performs discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition; Effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the variable ball-in means based on the result of discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific result of discrimination. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that varies from a restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; an establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition; Game ball An incoming ball signal output unit that outputs an incoming ball signal based on the incoming ball, and a privilege providing unit that provides a benefit that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable incoming ball unit. And the slave control means, based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode, and the effect determined by the effect mode determining means An effect executing means for executing the aspect, and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received for a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal.

  Accordingly, the slave control means can determine whether to execute the specific effect simply based on whether or not the establishment signal has been received from the main control means. Therefore, the slave control means directly determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is no need to determine. Therefore, the diversion of the control program set in the slave control means can be facilitated, so that there is an effect that the work load of the developer can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball-in means or when a predetermined period elapses. .

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball-in means or a predetermined period elapses. Since the specific effect has been executed, the variable ball entry is further performed for the player after a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The means can be made to recognize that the game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be pleased.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the sub-control unit receives the establishment signal output from the establishment signal output unit based on the elapse of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition. Gaming machine K3, which is provided with avoidance means for avoiding execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means is output by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition. When the specified signal is received, the specific effect is provided to avoid the execution of the specific effect. Can be notified that the ball has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be more pleased.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control means obtains information determined by the determination means based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and determines the information acquired by the acquisition means to satisfy the determination condition. A pre-determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and a prior signal indicating prior information based on a pre-determination result by the pre-determination means. A prior signal output means for outputting to the slave control means, and the slave control means has a prior information storage means for storing the prior information indicated by the prior signal, and the specific effect mode is A gaming machine K4 indicating the contents of the advance information stored in the advance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, the main control unit acquires the information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and causes the acquisition unit to store at least the acquired information until the determination condition is satisfied. Storage means; pre-determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied; and a prior signal indicating prior information based on a pre-determination result by the pre-determination means. A prior signal output means for outputting to the control means, and the slave control means has a prior information storage means for storing the prior information indicated by the prior signal, the specific effect mode, 3 shows the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  Thereby, in order to confirm the contents of the advance information, the player tries to make the game ball enter the variable ball entry means after the predetermined condition is satisfied, and actively plays the game ball to the player during the execution of the bonus game. Can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine K1 according to any one of the gaming machines in each of the above embodiments and control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine K2 according to any one of the gaming machines in each of the above embodiments and control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

The gaming machine K3 according to any one of the gaming machines in each of the above embodiments or control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state occurs, the large opening provided on the board is set to the open state. By causing a game ball to be awarded to the large opening, a prize ball is given to the player, which is advantageous to the player by being in a hit state. Note that the large opening is set to a closed state in which it becomes difficult for game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls wins after being set to the open state. Some of such conventional gaming machines execute a special effect (over-winning effect) when a winning of a specified number or more of game balls is detected in a large open state with one open state. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2015-112239).
In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to count the number of gaming balls that have won a large opening in order to determine whether or not to execute an over-winning effect. It was common that the number of entering balls before the mouth was closed was different. Therefore, it is necessary to reset the condition of whether or not to execute the over-winning prize effect according to the model, so that the program adopted for one model cannot be diverted to another gaming machine as it is. Was. That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the workload of a developer.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 comprises a main control unit for executing a game control, a sub-control unit for executing a game control based on a control signal from the main control unit, A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can enter and a regulation state in which the entry of game balls is regulated, and the main control means performs the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition. Determining means for performing, effect information determining means for determining the effect information for performing the effect based on the determination result by the determining means, based on the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result, A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; and an establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition And the said It is advantageous to the player based on the entering ball signal output means for outputting an entering ball signal based on the game ball entering the deformed ball means, and based on the entering of the game ball into the variable entering ball means. Effect providing means for giving a special privilege, wherein the slave control means determines an effect mode based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, and the effect mode An effect executing means for executing the effect mode determined by the determining means, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal. Effect execution means.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the predetermined condition is that a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball-in means or a predetermined period has elapsed. It is established in the case.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the slave control unit outputs the establishment signal based on a predetermined period having passed as the predetermined condition. When the establishment signal output by the means is received, an avoiding means for avoiding execution of the specific effect is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the main control means for executing the control of the game, the slave control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the game ball enters the ball. Discriminating means for variably entering into a possible open state and a regulated state in which entering of a game ball is regulated, wherein the main control means performs a decision based on the fulfillment of a decision condition And effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means. The variable ball entry based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which a means is changed from the regulated state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; an establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on establishment of the predetermined condition; For ball entry means A ball entry signal output unit that outputs a ball entry signal based on the fact that a game ball has entered, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry unit. A bonus granting means, wherein the slave control means is based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, and the effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means. The effect execution means for executing the effect mode, after receiving the establishment signal, when the incoming signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect, Having.
Thereby, there is an effect that the work load of the developer can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the predetermined condition is such that a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball-in means. This is established when a predetermined period has elapsed.
Thereby, after the specific effect is executed, after the predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or after a predetermined time elapses, the player can It can be recognized that the game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be pleased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the slave control means may determine that a predetermined period has elapsed as the predetermined condition. When the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means is received based on the above, the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect is provided.
This allows the player to be notified that the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number has entered the variable ball entry means due to the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be more pleased.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 1st prize hole (ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 main controller (main controller)
113 sound lamp control device (part of slave control means)
203j winning number counter (counting means)
S305 determination means
S307, S309 production information determination means
S1004 bonus game execution means
S2074, S5306 Information setting means
S3304 opening effect execution means

Claims (2)

Main control means for performing control of the game,
Slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means;
In a gaming machine having an open state in which a game ball can enter and a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a regulation state in which the entry of the game ball is regulated ,
The main control means includes:
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination based on satisfaction of a discrimination condition;
Effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect for indicating a determination result by the determining means,
Counting means capable of counting the game balls entered into the variable ball entry means,
When the counting means counts that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball input means from the restricted state to the open state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. is varied to establish possible regulations condition is satisfied, benefits that can be varied to the regulatory requirements of the variable ball entrance means from the restricted state after a predetermined interval period has elapsed the open state is established A privilege game execution means capable of executing a game,
Establishment signal output means capable of outputting an establishment signal to the slave control means based on establishment of the regulation condition;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, an entry signal output means capable of outputting an entry signal to the slave control means ,
Based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player,
The slave control means includes:
Based on the effect information determined by the effect information determination means, effect mode determination means for determining the effect mode,
Effect performing means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means,
A period determination unit capable of determining period information corresponding to an elapsed period after receiving the establishment signal,
When the establishment signal is received, the variable ball entry means sets regulation information that can be identified as being in the regulation state, and the period information corresponding to the elapse of the interval period is determined by the period determination unit. Information setting means capable of setting release information that can identify that the variable ball entry means is in the open state based on the
Upon receiving the ball entry signal, specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on determining that the regulation information is set ,
Opening effect executing means capable of executing an opening effect for indicating that the variable ball-entering means is set to the open state based on determining that the interval period has elapsed since receiving the establishment signal. , gaming machine, characterized in that those having. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means for displaying a display mode in the effect.

Images